WO2004113347A1 - Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors - Google Patents

Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004113347A1
WO2004113347A1 PCT/GB2004/002621 GB2004002621W WO2004113347A1 WO 2004113347 A1 WO2004113347 A1 WO 2004113347A1 GB 2004002621 W GB2004002621 W GB 2004002621W WO 2004113347 A1 WO2004113347 A1 WO 2004113347A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
title compound
lcms
minutes
formula
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/GB2004/002621
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Daniel Christopher Brookings
Jeremy Martin Davis
Barry John Langham
Original Assignee
Celltech R & D Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from GB0314492A external-priority patent/GB0314492D0/en
Priority claimed from GB0329485A external-priority patent/GB0329485D0/en
Priority to MXPA05013227A priority Critical patent/MXPA05013227A/en
Priority to BRPI0410653-9A priority patent/BRPI0410653A/en
Priority to US10/561,052 priority patent/US7521460B2/en
Priority to CA002528602A priority patent/CA2528602A1/en
Application filed by Celltech R & D Limited filed Critical Celltech R & D Limited
Priority to EP04742976A priority patent/EP1641804A1/en
Priority to AU2004249495A priority patent/AU2004249495A1/en
Priority to JP2006516443A priority patent/JP2007516161A/en
Priority to EA200600064A priority patent/EA010297B1/en
Publication of WO2004113347A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004113347A1/en
Priority to IL172132A priority patent/IL172132A0/en
Priority to NO20060279A priority patent/NO20060279L/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00

Definitions

  • This invention relates to a series of thienopyridone derivatives, to compositions containing them, to processes for their preparation and to their use in medicine.
  • Immune and inflammatory responses involve a variety of cell types with control and co-ordination of the various interactions occurring via both cell- cell contacts (e.g. integrin interactions with their receptors) and by way of intercellular signalling molecules.
  • a large number of different signalling molecules are involved, including cytokines, lymphocytes, chemokines and growth factors.
  • Cells respond to such intercellular signalling molecules by means of intracellular signalling mechanisms that include protein kinases, phosphatases and phospholipases.
  • protein kinases There are five classes of protein kinase of which the major ones are the tyrosine kinases and the serine/threonine kinases [Hunter, T., Methods in Enzymology (Protein Kinase Classification), p. 3, Hunter, T. and Sefton, B.M. eds., vol. 200, Academic Press, San Diego, 1991].
  • MAP mitogen activating protein
  • ERKs extracellular regulated kinases
  • JNKs or SAP kinases stress activated kinases
  • p38 kinases which have a threonine-glycine-tyrosine (TGY) activation motif.
  • TGY threonine-glycine-tyrosine activation motif.
  • Both the JNKs and p38 MAP kinases are primarily activated by stress stimuli including, but not limited to, proinflammatory cytokines, e.g. tumour necrosis factor (TNF) and interleukin-1 (IL-1 ), ultraviolet light, endotoxin and chemical or osmotic shock.
  • proinflammatory cytokines e.g. tumour necrosis factor (TNF) and interleukin-1 (IL-1 )
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • CSBP-1 CSAID binding protein-1
  • CSBP-2 CSAID binding protein-1
  • CSBP-2 differs from CSBP-1 in an internal sequence of 25 amino acids as a result of differential splicing of two exons that are conserved in both mouse and human [McDonnell, P. C. et al., Genomics, 1995, 29, 301-2].
  • CSBP-1 and p38 ⁇ are expressed ubiquitously and there is no difference between the two isoforms with respect to tissue distribution, activation profile, substrate preference or CSAID binding.
  • a second isoform is p38 ⁇ which has 70% identity with p38 ⁇ .
  • a second form of p38 ⁇ termed p38 ⁇ 2 is also known and of the two this is believed to be the major form.
  • p38 ⁇ and p38 ⁇ 2 are expressed in many different tissues. However in monocytes and macrophages p38 ⁇ is the predominant kinase activity [Lee, J. C, ibid; Jing, Y. et al., J. Biol. Chem., 1996, 271 , 10531-34; Hale, K. K.
  • p38 ⁇ and p38 ⁇ (also termed SAP kinase-3 and SAP kinase-4 respectively) have -63% and -61 % homology to p38 ⁇ respectively.
  • p38 ⁇ is predominantly expressed in skeletal muscle whilst p38 ⁇ is found in testes, pancreas, prostate, small intestine and in certain endocrine tissues.
  • All p38 homologues and splice variants contain a 12 amino acid activation loop that includes a Thr-Gly-Tyr motif. Dual phosphorylation of both Thr-180 and Tyr-182 in the TGY motif by a dual specificity upstream kinase is essential for the activation of p38 and results in a >1000-fold increase in specific activity of these enzymes [Doza, Y. N. et al., FEBS Lett., 1995, 364, 7095-8012]. This dual phosphorylation is effected by MKK6 and under certain conditions the related enzyme MKK3 [Enslen, H. et al., J. Biol. Chem., 1998, 273, 1741-48].
  • MKK3 and MKK6 belong to a family of enzymes termed MAPKK (mitogen activating protein kinase kinase) which are in turn activated by MAPKKK (mitogen activating kinase kinase kinase) otherwise known as MAP3K.
  • MAPKK mitogen activating protein kinase kinase
  • MAPKKK mitogen activating kinase kinase kinase
  • MEKK4/MTK1 MAP or ERK kinase kinase/MAP three kinase-1
  • ASK1 apoptosis stimulated kinase
  • TAK1 TGF- ⁇ -activated kinase
  • TAK1 has been shown to activate MKK6 in response to transforming growth factor- ⁇ (TGF- ⁇ ).
  • TNF-stimulated activation of p38 is believed to be mediated by the recruitment of TRAF2 [TNF receptor associated factor] and the Fas adaptor protein, Daxx, which results in the activation of ASK1 and subsequently p38.
  • MAPK activated protein kinase 2/3/5 MAPK activated protein kinase 2/3/5
  • PRAK p38 regulated/activated protein kinase
  • MNK1/2 MAP kinase-interacting kinase 1/2
  • MSK1/RLPK mitogen- and stress-activated protein kinase 1
  • RSK-B ribosomal S6 kinase-B
  • ATF2/6 activating transcription factor 2/6
  • MEF2A C monocyte-enhancer factor-2A/C
  • C/EBP homologous protein C/EBP homologous protein
  • Elk1 and Sap-1a1 activating transcription factor 2/6
  • MEF2A C monocyte-enhancer factor-2A/C
  • CHOP C/EBP homologous protein
  • Elk1 and Sap-1a1 activating substrates [e.g. cPLA2, p47phox].
  • MAPKAP K2 is activated by p38 in response to environmental stress. Mice engineered to lack MAPKAP K2 do not produce TNF in response to lipopolysaccharide (LPS). Production of several other cytokines such as IL- 1 , IL-6, IFN-g and IL-10 is also partially inhibited [Kotlyarov, A. et al., Nature Cell Biol., 1999, 1 , 94-7]. Further, MAPKAP K2 from embryonic stem cells from p38 ⁇ null mice was not activated in response to stress and these cells did not produce IL-6 in response to IL-1 [Allen, M. et al., J. Exp. Med., 2000, 191 , 859-69].
  • MAPKAP K2 is not only essential for TNF and IL-1 production but also for signalling induced by cytokines.
  • MAPKAP K2/3 phosphorylate and thus regulate heat shock proteins HSP 25 and HSP 27 which are involved in cytoskeletal reorganization.
  • these small molecule inhibitors are known to decrease the synthesis of a wide variety of pro-inflammatory proteins including IL-6, IL-8, granulocyte/macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF) and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2).
  • IL-6 IL-6
  • IL-8 granulocyte/macrophage colony-stimulating factor
  • COX-2 cyclooxygenase-2
  • TNF-induced phosphorylation and activation of cytosolic PLA2 TNF-induced expression of VCAM-1 on endothelial cells and IL-1 stimulated synthesis of collagenase and stromelysin are also inhibited by small molecule inhibitors of p38 [Cohen, P., Trends Cell Biol., 1997, 7, 353- 61].
  • TNF and IL-1 A variety of cells including monocytes and macrophages produce TNF and IL-1. Excessive or unregulated TNF production is implicated in a number of disease states including Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, pyresis, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteoarthritis, gouty arthritis and other arthritic conditions, toxic shock syndrome, endotoxic shock, sepsis, septic shock, gram negative sepsis, bone resorption diseases, reperfusion injury, graft vs.
  • IL-1 has been implicated in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, acute synovitis, psoriatic arthritis, cachexia, Reiter's syndrome, endotoxemia, toxic shock syndrome, tuberculosis, atherosclerosis, muscle degeneration, and other acute or chronic inflammatory diseases such as the inflammatory reaction induced by endotoxin or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • IL-1 has been linked to diabetes and pancreatic ⁇ cell destruction [Dinarello, C. A., J. Clinical Immunology, 1985, 5, 287-97].
  • IL-8 is a chemotactic factor produced by various cell types including endothelial cells, mononuclear cells, fibroblasts and keratinocytes.
  • IL-1 , TNF and LPS all induce the production of IL-8 by endothelial cells.
  • In vitro IL-8 has been shown to have a number of functions including being a chemoattractant for neutrophils, T-lymphocytes and basophils.
  • IL-8 has also been shown to increase the surface expression of Mac-1 (CD11 b/CD18) on neutrophils without de novo protein synthesis which may contribute to increased adhesion of neutrophils to vascular endothelial cells.
  • Mac-1 CD11 b/CD18
  • Many diseases are characterised by massive neutrophil infiltration. Histamine release from basophils (in both atopic and normal individuals) is induced by IL-8 as is lysozomal enzyme release and respiratory burst from neutrophils.
  • p38 occupies within the cascade of signalling molecules mediating extracellular to intracellular signalling and its influence over not only IL-1 , TNF and IL-8 production but also the synthesis and/or action of other pro-inflammatory proteins (e.g. IL-6, GM-CSF, COX-2, collagenase and stromelysin) make it an attractive target for inhibition by small molecule inhibitors with the expectation that such inhibition would be a highly effective mechanism for regulating the excessive and destructive activation of the immune system.
  • pro-inflammatory proteins e.g. IL-6, GM-CSF, COX-2, collagenase and stromelysin
  • Y is a linking group -C(O)- or -S(0) 2 -; n is zero or the integer 1 ; m is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4; p is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
  • R d is an -OH, -(Alk 2 )OH (where Alk 2 is a straight or branched C ⁇ - 4 alkylene chain), -OR 1 (where R 1 is a straight or branched C ⁇ . 6 alkyl group), -(Alk 2 )OR 1 ,
  • R 2 and R 3 may be the same or different and is each independently a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched C- ⁇ _6 alkyl group
  • Alk 1 is a straight or branched C ⁇ -4 alkylene chain
  • Cy 1 is an optionally substituted cycloaliphatic, aromatic or heteroaromatic group
  • Ar is an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group
  • compounds of formula (1 ) may have one or more chiral centres, and exist as enantiomers or diastereomers.
  • the invention is to be understood to extend to all such enantiomers, diastereomers and mixtures thereof in any proportion, including racemates.
  • Formula (1) and the formulae hereinafter are intended to represent all individual isomers and mixtures thereof, unless stated or shown otherwise.
  • Formula (1 ) and the formulae hereinafter are intended to represent all individual tautomers and mixtures thereof, unless stated otherwise.
  • alkyl whether present as a group or part of a group includes straight or branched C 1 - 6 alkyl groups, for example C 1-4 alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl or terf-butyl groups.
  • alkenyl or “alkynyl” are intended to mean straight or branched C 2-6 alkenyl or C 2-6 alkynyl groups such as C 2- alkenyl or C 2-4 alkynyl groups.
  • the optional substituents which may be present on these groups include one, two, three or more substituents where each substituent may be the same or different and is selected from halogen atoms, e.g.
  • R 4 is an optionally substituted straight or branched C ⁇ -6 alkyl group, and is in particular a straight or branched C ⁇ -4 alkyl group
  • R 4 is an optionally substituted straight or branched C ⁇ -6 alkyl group, and is in particular a straight or branched C ⁇ -4 alkyl group
  • R 4 is an optionally substituted straight or branched C ⁇ -6 alkyl group, and is in particular a straight or branched C ⁇ -4 alkyl group
  • R 4 is an optionally substituted straight or branched C ⁇ -6 alkyl group, and is in particular a straight or branched C ⁇ -4 alkyl group
  • -CONHR 4 e.g. -CONHCH 3
  • -CON(R 4 ) 2 e.g. -CON(CH 3 ) 2
  • -COR 4 e.g. -COCH 3
  • C- ⁇ - 6 alkoxy e.g.
  • heterocyclic rings may be optionally interrupted by a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group selected from -0-, -S-, -N(R 4 )-, -C(O)- or -C(S)- groups.
  • heterocyclic rings include piperidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl and piperazinyl rings.
  • halogen is intended to include fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms.
  • haloalkyl is intended to include those alkyl groups just mentioned substituted by one, two or three of the halogen atoms just described. Particular examples of such groups include -CF 3 , -CCI 3 , -CHF 2 , -CHCI 2 , -CH 2 F and -CH 2 CI groups.
  • alkoxy as used herein is intended to include straight or branched C 1 - 6 alkoxy, e.g. C ⁇ - alkoxy such as methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, isobutoxy and ferf-butoxy.
  • "Haloalkoxy” as used herein includes any of these alkoxy groups substituted by one, two or three halogen atoms as described above. Particular examples include -OCF 3 , -OCCI 3 , -OCHF 2 , -OCHCI 2 , -OCH2F and -OCH2CI groups.
  • alkylthio is intended to include straight or branched C- ⁇ - 6 alkylthio, e.g. C- 1 - 4 alkylthio such as methylthio or ethylthio.
  • alkylamino or “dialkylamino” is intended to include the groups -NHR 1a and -N(R 1a )(R 1b ) where R 1a and R 1b is each independently an optionally substituted straight or branched alkyl group or both together with the N atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl group which may contain a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group such as an -O- or -S- atom or -N(R 1a )- group.
  • optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl groups include optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and ⁇ /-C ⁇ - 6 alkylpiperazinyl groups.
  • the optional substituents which may be present on such heterocycloalkyl groups include those optional substituents as described above in relation to the term "alkyl".
  • alkylene chains represented by Alk 1 and/or Alk 2 when each is present in compounds of the invention include -CH 2 -, -CH2CH 2 -, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -, -(CH 2 ) 2 CH 2 -, -C(CH 3 ) 2 -, -(CH 2 ) 3 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH(CH 3 )CH2-, -C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 - or -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 2 - chains.
  • Optionally substituted cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 in compounds of the invention include optionally substituted C 3-10 cycloaliphatic groups. Particular examples include optionally substituted C 3- ⁇ o cycloalkyl, e.g. C 3- cycloalkyl, or C 3- ⁇ 0 cycloalkenyl, e.g. C 3- cycloalkenyl, groups.
  • cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 include optionally substituted cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, 2-cyclobuten-1-yl, 2-cyclopenten-1 -yl and 3-cyclopenten-1 -yl groups, especially cyclopropyl.
  • the optional substituents which may be present on the cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 include one, two, three or more substituents selected from halogen atoms, or C- ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g. methyl or ethyl, haloC ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g. halomethyl or haloethyl such as difluoromethyl or trifluoromethyl, optionally substituted by hydroxyl, e.g. -C(OH)(CF 3 )2, C- ⁇ - 6 alkoxy, e.g. methoxy or ethoxy, haloCi- ⁇ alkoxy, e.g.
  • Alk 3 chains include -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 - chains.
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and/or R 8 is present as a C 3-8 cycloalkyl group it may be for example a cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl group.
  • Optional substituents which may be present on such groups include for example one, two or three substituents which may be the same or different selected from halogen atoms, for example fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms, or hydroxy or C ⁇ _ 6 alkoxy, e.g. methoxy, ethoxy or isopropoxy, groups.
  • heterocyclic rings may be optionally interrupted by a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group selected from -0-, -S-, -N(R 7 )-, -C(O)- or -C(S)- groups.
  • Particular examples of such heterocyclic rings include piperidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl and piperazinyl rings.
  • R 5 is an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group it may be any such group as described hereinafter in relation to Cy 1 .
  • optionally substituted aromatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 include for example monocyclic or bicyclic fused ring C 6- ⁇ 2 aromatic groups, such as phenyl, 1- or 2-naphthyl, 1- or 2-tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl or indenyl groups, especially phenyl.
  • Heteroaromatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 include for example
  • Ci-g heteroaromatic groups containing for example one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • the heteroaromatic groups may be for example monocyclic or bicyclic fused ring heteroaromatic groups.
  • Monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include for example five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • Bicyclic heteroaromatic groups include for example eight- to thirteen- membered fused ring heteroaromatic groups containing one, two or more heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • heteroaromatic groups of these types include pyrrolyl, furyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, ⁇ /-C ⁇ -6 alkylimidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, 1 ,2,3-triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazolyl, 1 ,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1 ,2,5- oxadiazolyl, 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 1 ,3,4-thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, 1 ,3,5-triazinyl, 1 ,2,4-triazinyl, 1 ,2,3-triazinyl, benzofuryl, [2,3-dihydro]benzofuryl, benzothienyl, [2,3-dihydr
  • Optional substituents which may be present on aromatic or heteroaromatic groups represented by the group Cy 1 include one, two, three or more substituents, each selected from an atom or group R 10 in which R 10 is R 10a or
  • R 10a is a halogen atom, or an amino (-NH 2 ), substituted amino, nitro, cyano, hydroxyl (-OH), substituted hydroxyl, formyl, carboxyl (-CO 2 H), esterified carboxyl, thiol (-SH), substituted thiol, -COR 11 [where R 11 is an -L 6 Alk 3 (R 10a ) r , aryl or heteroaryl group], -CSR 11 , -S0 3 H, -SOR 11 , -SO2R 11 , -SO3R 11 , -SO2NH2, -S0 2 NHR 11 , -S0 2 N(R 11 ) 2) -CONH 2 , -CSNH 2 , -CONHR 11 , -CSNHR 11 , -CON(R 11 ) 2 , -CSN(R 11 ) 2) -N(
  • L 6 in the group -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a ) r is a linker atom or group it may be for example any divalent linking atom or group.
  • Particular examples include -O- or -S- atoms or -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(S)-, -S(O)-, -S(0) 2 ⁇ , -N(R 3 )- [where R 3 is a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched alkyl group], -N(R 3 )0-, -N(R 3 )N-, -CON(R 3 )-, -OC(0)N(R 3 )-, -CSN(R 3 )-, -N(R 3 )CO-, -N(R 3 )C(0)0-, -N(R 3 )CS-, -S(0) 2 N(R 3 )-, -N(R 3 )S(0) 2 -,
  • r r is an integer 1 , 2 or 3, it is to be understood that the substituent or substituents R 10a may be present on any suitable carbon atom in -Alk 5 . Where more than one R 10a substituent is present these may be the same or different and may be present on the same or different atom in -Alk 5 . Clearly, when r is zero and no substituent R 10a is present the alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene chain represented by Alk 5 becomes an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group.
  • R 10a is a substituted amino group it may be for example a group -NHR 11 [where R 11 is as defined above] or a group -N(R 11 ) 2 wherein each R 11 group is the same or different.
  • R 10a is a halogen atom it may be for example a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom.
  • R 10a is a substituted hydroxyl or substituted thiol group it may be for example a group -OR 11 or -SR 12 respectively.
  • Esterified carboxyl groups represented by the group R 10a include groups of formula -C0 2 Alk 6 wherein Alk 6 is a straight or branched, optionally substituted C ⁇ - ⁇ alkyl group such as a methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl or tert-butyl group; a C 6 -i 2 arylC ⁇ -8 alkyl group such as an optionally substituted benzyl, phenylethyl, phenylpropyl, 1-naphthylmethyl or 2- naphthylmethyl group; a G ⁇ aryl group such as an optionally substituted phenyl, 1-naphthyl or 2-naphthyl group; a group such as an optionally substituted phenyloxymethyl, phenyloxyethyl, 1-naphthyloxymethyl, or 2-naph
  • Aryl or heteroaryl groups represented by the groups R 10a or R 11 include mono- or bicyclic optionally substituted C ⁇ - 12 aromatic or C 1 . 9 heteroaromatic groups as described above for the group Cy 1 .
  • the aromatic and heteroaromatic groups may be attached to the group Cy 1 in compounds of formula (1) by any carbon atom or heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen atom, as appropriate.
  • each may be for example an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperidinyl or thiazolidinyl group.
  • Het may represent, for example, an optionally substituted cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl group.
  • Optional substituents which may be present on -NHet 1 include those substituents described above when Cy 1 is a heterocycloaliphatic group.
  • Particularly useful atoms or groups represented by R 10 include fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms, or C ⁇ -6 alkyl, e.g. methyl, ethyl, t?-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl or tert-butyl, optionally substituted phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, furyl, thiazolyl, or thienyl, C- ⁇ -6 hydroxyalkyl, e.g. hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl, carboxyC ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g. carboxyethyl, C 1-6 alkylthio, e.g.
  • methylthio or ethylthio carboxyC ⁇ - 6 alkylthio, e.g. carboxymethylthio, 2-carboxyethylthio or 3-carboxy- propylthio, Ci- ⁇ alkoxy, e.g. methoxy or ethoxy, hydroxyC 1-6 alkoxy, e.g. 2- hydroxyethoxy, optionally substituted phenoxy, pyridyloxy, thiazolyoxy, phenylthio or pyridylthio, C 3-7 cycloalkyl, e.g. cyclobutyl or cyclopentyl, C 5 - 7 cycloalkoxy, e.g.
  • cyclopentyloxy haloC ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g. trifluoromethyl, haloC ⁇ - 6 alkoxy, e.g. trifluoromethoxy, Ci- ⁇ alkylamino, e.g. methylamino or ethylamino, -CH(CH 3 )NH 2 or -C(CH 3 ) 2 NH 2 , haloC 1-6 alkylamino, e.g. fluoroC ⁇ -6 alkylamino, -CH(CF 3 )NH 2 or -C(CF 3 ) 2 NH 2 , amino (-NH 2 ), aminoCi- ⁇ alkyl, e.g.
  • Ci-ealkylaminoCi- ⁇ alkyl e.g. ethylaminoethyl
  • Ci- ⁇ dialkylaminoCi-ealkyl e.g. diethylaminoethyl
  • aminoCi- ⁇ alkoxy e.g. aminoethoxy
  • C-i-ealkylaminoCi-ealkoxy e.g. methylaminoethoxy
  • Ci- ⁇ dialkyl- aminoC ⁇ - 6 alkoxy e.g.
  • acetyl optionally substituted benzoyl, thiol (-SH), thioC ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g thiomethyl or thioethyl, sulphonyl (-S0 3 H), C ⁇ -6 alkylsulphonyl, e.g methylsulphonyl, aminosulphonyl (-S0 2 NH 2 ), Ci- ⁇ alkylaminosulphonyl, e.g methylaminosulphonyl or ethylaminosulphonyl, Ci- ⁇ dialkylaminosulphonyl, e.g dimethylaminosulphonyl or diethylaminosulphonyl, phenylaminosulphonyl carboxamido (-CONH 2 ), C ⁇ - 6 alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g.
  • Ci- ⁇ dialkylaminocarbonyl e.g. dimethylaminocarbonyl or diethylaminocarbonyl, aminoC 1-6 alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. aminoethylamino- carbonyl, C 1 . 6 dialkylaminoC ⁇ -6 alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. diethylaminoethyl- aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, C ⁇ - 6 alkylaminocarbonylamino, e.g.
  • methylaminocarbonylamino or ethylaminocarbonylamino C ⁇ - 6 dialkylamino- carbonylamino, e.g. dimethylaminocarbonylamino or diethylamino- carbonylamino, C ⁇ - 6 alkylaminocabonylC ⁇ - 6 alkylamino, e.g. methylamino- carbonylmethylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, Ci- ⁇ alkylaminothiocarbonyl- amino, e.g. methylaminothiocarbonylamino or ethylaminothiocarbonylamino, Ci-edialkylaminothiocarbonylamino, e.g.
  • Ci- ⁇ alkylsulphonyl- amino e.g. methylsulphonylamino or ethylsulphonylamino
  • Ci- ⁇ dialkyl- sulphonylamino e.g.
  • dimethyl- aminosulphonylamino or diethylaminosulphonylamino optionally substituted morpholinesulphonylamino or morpholinesulphonylCi- ⁇ alkylamino, optionally substituted phenylaminosulphonylamino, C ⁇ - 6 alkanoylamino, e.g. acetylamino, aminoCi- ⁇ alkanoylamino, e.g. aminoacetylamino, C ⁇ . 6 dialkylaminoC ⁇ _ 6 alkanoyl- amino, e.g. dimethylaminoacetylamino, C ⁇ -6 alkanoylaminoC ⁇ - 6 alkyl, e.g.
  • acetylaminomethyl Ci-ealkanoylaminoCi- ⁇ alkylamino, e.g. acetamidoethyl- amino, C ⁇ - 6 alkoxycarbonylamino, e.g. methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonyl- amino or tert-butoxycarbonylamino, or optionally substituted benzyloxy, pyridyl methoxy, thiazolylmethoxy, benzyloxycarbonylamino, benzyloxy- carbonylaminoCi- ⁇ alkyl, e.g. benzyloxycarbonylaminoethyl, benzothio, pyridyl- methylthio orthiazolylmethylthio groups.
  • a further particularly useful group of substituents represented by R 10 when present on aromatic or heteroaromatic groups includes substituents of formula
  • L 6 is preferably a covalent bond or an -O- or -S- atom or -N(R 3 )-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -O-C(O)-, -N(R 3 )CO-, -CON(R 3 )- or -N(R 3 )S(0) 2 - group
  • Alk 5 is an optionally substituted C h alky!
  • R 10a is an optionally substituted Het group as herein defined or an optionally substituted heteroaromatic group as hereinbefore described in relation to Cy 1 .
  • two R 10 substituents may be linked together to form a cyclic group such as a cyclic ether, e.g. a C ⁇ -6 alkylenedioxy group such as methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy.
  • a cyclic group such as a cyclic ether, e.g. a C ⁇ -6 alkylenedioxy group such as methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy.
  • R 10 substituents are present, these need not necessarily be the same atoms and/or groups.
  • the substituent(s) may be present at any available ring position on the aromatic or heteroaromatic group represented by the group Cy 1 .
  • the substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group represented by Ar in compounds of the invention may be any aromatic or heteroaromatic group as hereinbefore described for Cy 1 .
  • Optional substituents which may be present include those R 10 atoms and groups as generally or particularly described in relation to Cy 1 aromatic and heteroaromatic groups.
  • Suitable salts include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, for example acid addition salts derived from inorganic or organic acids, and salts derived from inorganic and organic bases.
  • Acid addition salts include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, alkylsulfonates, e.g. methanesulfonates, ethanesulfonates, or isothionates, arylsulfonates, e.g. p-toluenesulfonates, besylates or napsylates, phosphates, sulphates, hydrogensulphates, acetates, trifluoroacetates, propionates, citrates, maleates, fumarates, malonates, succinates, lactates, oxalates, tartrates and benzoates.
  • Salts derived from inorganic or organic bases include alkali metal salts such as sodium or potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as magnesium or calcium salts, and organic amine salts such as morpholine, piperidine, dimethylamine or diethylamine salts.
  • Particularly useful salts of compounds according to the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, especially acid addition pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • Y is -C(O)-. In another embodiment, Y is -S(0) 2 -.
  • n is the integer 1.
  • Alk 1 is preferably a -CH 2 CH 2 - chain or more especially is -CH 2 -.
  • n is zero.
  • Cy 1 optionally substituted cycloaliphatic groups include optionally substituted C 3-7 cycloalkyl groups, especially cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl groups. Cy 1 is in particular a cyclopropyl group.
  • Each of these preferred Cy 1 cycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted.
  • substituents these may in particular include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or C-i-e alkyl groups, especially Ci -3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi-ealkyl groups, especially fluoroCi- ⁇ alkyl groups, most especially a -CF 3 group, or C 1-6 alkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloCi- ⁇ alkoxy groups, especially fluoroC ⁇ -6 alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF 3 group, or a cyano (-CN), esterified carboxyl, especially -C0 2 CH 3 or -C0 2 C(CH 3 ) 3 , nitro (-N0 2 ), amino (-NH 2 ), substituted amino, especially -NHCH 3 or -N(
  • Particularly preferred Cy 1 aromatic groups include optionally substituted phenyl groups.
  • Particularly preferred heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups, especially optionally substituted five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • Particularly preferred optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl and triazinyl groups.
  • the heteroaromatic group may be an eight- to thirteen-membered bicyclic fused ring containing one or two oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • Particularly useful groups of this type include optionally substituted indolyl groups.
  • Particularly preferred optional substituents which may be present on Cy 1 aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include one, two or three atoms or groups -R 10a or -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a ) r as hereinbefore defined.
  • Particularly useful optional substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or C ⁇ _ 6 alkyl groups, especially C-i -3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi- ⁇ alkyl groups, especially fluoroCi- ⁇ alkyl groups, most especially a -CF 3 group, or C-i- ⁇ alkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloC-i- ⁇ alkoxy groups, especially fluoroC ⁇ -6alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF 3 group, or a cyano (-CN), carboxyl (-C0 2 H), esterified carboxyl (-C0 2
  • Cy 1 aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include groups of formula -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a ) r in which r is the integer 1 or 2, L 6 is a covalent bond or an -O- or -S- atom or a -N(R 3 )-, especially -NH- or -N(CH 3 )-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -N(R 3 )CO-, especially -NHCO-, or -CON(R 3 )-, especially -CONH-, group, Alk 5 is a Ci -6 alkylene chain, especially a -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - chain, and R 10a is a hydroxyl or substituted hydroxyl group, especially a -OCH 3 , -
  • R 10a is an optionally substituted heteroaromatic group, especially a five- or six-membered monocyclic heteroaromatic group containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms, such as optionally substituted pyrrolyl, furyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, pyridazinyl, or pyrazinyl group.
  • Particularly preferred optional substituents on the -Het groups just described include hydroxyl (-OH) and carboxyl (-C0 2 H) groups or those preferred optional substituents just described in relation to the group Cy 1 , especially when Cy 1 is a cycloalkyl group.
  • Cy 1 is an optionally substituted phenyl group, especially a phenyl group optionally substituted by one, two or three substituents where at least one, and preferably two, substituents are located ort/io to the bond joining Cy 1 to the remainder of the compound of formula (1).
  • Particularly preferred ortho substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine or chlorine atoms, or C 1 - 3 alkyl groups, especially methyl, C 1 - 3 alkoxy groups, especially methoxy, haloC 1-3 alkyl groups, especially -CF 3 , haloC ⁇ -3 alkoxy groups, especially -OCF 3 , or cyano (-CN), groups.
  • a second or third optional substituent when present in a position other than the ortho positions of the ring Cy 1 may be preferably an atom or group -R 10a or -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a ) r as herein generally and particularly described.
  • the Cy 1 phenyl group may have a substituent para to the bond joining Cy 1 to the remainder of the compound of formula (1).
  • Particular para substituents include those particularly preferred ortho substituents just described. Where desired, the para substituent may be present with other ortho or meta substituents as just mentioned.
  • Cy 1 examples include halogen (especially fluoro or chloro) and C-
  • Cy 1 groups include phenyl, fluorophenyl, chlorophenyl, methylphenyl and cyclopropyl.
  • Particularly preferred Ar aromatic groups in compounds of formula (1 ) include optionally substituted phenyl groups.
  • Particularly preferred heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups, especially optionally substituted five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
  • Particularly preferred optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl and triazinyl groups.
  • Particularly preferred optional substituents which may be present on Ar aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include atoms or groups -R 10a or -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a )r as hereinbefore defined.
  • Particularly useful optional substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or C 1 - 6 alkyl groups, especially C ⁇ -3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi- ⁇ alkyl groups, especially fluoroC ⁇ -6 alkyl groups, most especially a -CF3 group, or C-i- ⁇ alkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloC ⁇ _6alkoxy groups, especially fluoroC ⁇ -6 alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF 3 group, or a cyano (-CN), esterified carboxyl, especially -C0 2 CH 3 or -C0 2 C(CH 3 ) 3
  • Ar groups in compounds of formula (1 ) include phenyl and mono- or disubstituted phenyl groups in which each substituent is in particular a -R 10a or -L 6 Alk 5 (R 10a ) r atom or group as just defined and is especially a halogen atom or a C ⁇ _ 3 alkyl, C ⁇ -3 alkoxy or -CN group.
  • Examples of specific substituents on Ar include halogen (especially fluoro or chloro), cyano and C-i -4 alkyl (especially methyl).
  • Ar groups include phenyl, difluorophenyl, (chloro)(fluoro)phenyl, (fluoro)(methyl)phenyl, chlorophenyl, cyanophenyl and methylphenyl.
  • Alk 2 when present in compounds of the invention include -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, -C(CH 3 ) 2 - and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -.
  • Alk 2 is -CH 2 -.
  • Alk 2 is -C(CH 3 ) 2 -.
  • R 1 is methyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen or methyl.
  • R 3 is hydrogen or methyl.
  • R 2 and R 3 are both hydrogen.
  • R 2 and R 3 are both methyl.
  • m may be selected to vary the ring size from a ring having, in addition to the nitrogen atom, a minimum of 3 carbon atoms up to 6 carbon atoms. Particularly advantageous rings are those wherein m is the integer 1 or 2.
  • n is the integer 2. In another embodiment, m is the integer 1. In a further embodiment, m is the integer 3.
  • p is the integer 1. In another embodiment, p is the integer 2.
  • Each substituent R d may be present on any ring carbon atom. In one particular class of compounds of the invention one or two R d substituents are present.
  • Suitable values of R d include -OH, -(Alk 2 )OH, -(Alk 2 )OR 1 , -NR 2 R 3 and -(Alk 2 )NR 2 R 3 .
  • R d Detailed values of R d include -OH, -CH 2 OH, -C(CH 3 ) 2 OH, -CH 2 OCH 3 , -NH 2 , -N(CH 3 ) 2 and -CH 2 NH 2 .
  • R d Representative values include -OH, -(Alk 2 )OH and -(Alk 2 )OR 1 .
  • R d Illustrative values of R d include -OH, -CH 2 OH, -C(CH 3 ) 2 OH and -CH 2 OCH 3 .
  • R d substituents include -OH, -CH 2 OH, -CH(CH 3 )OH and -C(CH 3 ) 2 OH groups.
  • Particularly useful compounds of the invention include each of the compounds described in the Examples hereinafter, and the salts, solvates, hydrates and /V-oxides thereof.
  • Compounds according to the invention are potent and selective inhibitors of p38 kinases, including all isoforms and splice variants thereof. More specifically the compounds of the invention are inhibitors of p38 ⁇ , p38 ⁇ and p38 ⁇ 2. The ability of the compounds to act in this way may be simply determined by employing tests such as those described in the Examples hereinafter.
  • the compounds of formula (1) are of use in modulating the activity of p38 kinases and in particular are of use in the prophylaxis and treatment of any p38 kinase mediated diseases or disorders in a human, or other mammal.
  • the invention extends to such a use and to the use of the compounds for the manufacture of a medicament for treating such diseases or disorders. Further the invention extends to the administration to a human of an effective amount of a p38 inhibitor for treating any such disease or disorder.
  • the invention also extends to the prophylaxis or treatment of any disease or disorder in which p38 kinase plays a role including conditions caused by excessive or unregulated pro-inflammatory cytokine production including for example excessive or unregulated TNF, IL-1 , IL-6 and IL-8 production in a human, or other mammal.
  • the invention extends to such a use and to the use of the compounds for the manufacture of a medicament for treating such cytokine-mediated diseases or disorders. Further the invention extends to the administration to a human of an effective amount of a p38 inhibitor for treating any such disease or disorder.
  • cytokines including the cytokines TNF, IL-1 , IL-6 and IL-8
  • autoimmune diseases include without limitation autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, neurodegenerative disorders, viral diseases, allergies, infectious diseases, heart attacks, angiogenic disorders, reperfusion/ischemia in stroke, vascular hyperplasia, organ hypoxia, cardiac hypertrophy, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation and conditions associated with prostaglandin endoperoxidase synthetase-2 (COX-2).
  • Autoimmune diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, glomerulonephritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, chronic thyroiditis, Grave's disease, hemolytic anemia, autoimmune gastritis, autoimmune neutropenia, thrombocytopenia, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, atopic dermatitis, graft vs host disease and psoriasis.
  • the invention further extends to the particular autoimmune disease rheumatoid arthritis.
  • Inflammatory diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to asthma, allergies, respiratory distress syndrome and acute or chronic pancreatitis.
  • Destructive bone disorders which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to osteoporosis, osteoarthritis and multiple myeloma-related bone disorder.
  • Proliferative diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to acute or chronic myelogenous leukemia, Kaposi's sarcoma, metastatic melanoma and multiple myeloma.
  • Neurodegenerative diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, cerebral ischemias and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury.
  • Viral diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to acute hepatitis infection (including hepatitis A, hepatitis B and hepatitis C), HIV infection and CMV retinitis.
  • Infectious diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to septic shock, sepsis and Shigellosis.
  • p38 inhibitors of this invention also exhibit inhibition of expression of inducible pro-inflammatory proteins such as prostaglandin endoperoxidase synthetase-2, otherwise known as cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2), and are therefore of use in therapy.
  • Pro-inflammatory mediators of the cyclooxygenase pathway derived from arachidonic acid are produced by inducible COX-2 enzyme. Regulation of COX-2 would regulate these pro- inflammatory mediators such as prostaglandins, which affect a wide variety of cells and are important and critical inflammatory mediators of a wide variety of disease states and conditions. In particular these inflammatory mediators have been implicated in pain, such as in the sensitization of pain receptors, or edema. Accordingly additional p38 mediated conditions which may be prevented or treated include edema, analgesia, fever and pain such as neuromuscular pain, headache, dental pain, arthritis pain and pain caused by cancer.
  • TNF mediated diseases or conditions include for example rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteoarthritis, gouty arthritis and other arthritic conditions, sepsis, septic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, cerebral malaria, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, silicosis, pulmonary sarcoidosis, bone resorption disease, reperfusion injury, graft vs.
  • viral infections such as HIV, CMV, influenza and herpes
  • veterinary viral infections such as lentivirus infections, including but not limited to equine infectious anemia virus, caprine arthritis virus, visna virus or maedi virus; or retrovirus infections, including feline immunodeficiency virus, bovine immunodeficiency virus and canine immunodeficiency virus.
  • viruses of the invention may also be used in the treatment of viral infections, where such viruses elicit TNF production in vivo or are sensitive to upregulation by TNF.
  • viruses include those that produce TNF as a result of infection and those that are sensitive to inhibition, for instance as a result of decreased replication, directly or indirectly by the TNF inhibiting compounds of the invention.
  • viruses include, but are not limited to, HIV-1 , HIV-2 and HIV-3, Cytomegalovirus (CMV), Influenza, adenovirus and the Herpes group of viruses such as Herpes Zoster and Herpes Simplex.
  • IL-1 mediated diseases or conditions include for example rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, stroke, endotoxemia and/or toxic shock syndrome, inflammatory reaction induced by endotoxin, diabetes, pancreatic ⁇ -cell disease, Alzheimer's disease, tuberculosis, atherosclerosis, muscle degeneration and cachexia.
  • IL-8 mediated diseases and conditions include for example those characterized by massive neutrophil infiltration such as psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, asthma, cardiac, brain and renal reperfusion injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome, thrombosis and glomerulonephritis.
  • the increased IL-8 production associated with each of these diseases is responsible for the chemotaxis of neutrophils into inflammatory sites. This is due to the unique property of IL-8 (in comparison to TNF, IL-1 and IL-6) of promoting neutrophil chemotaxis and activation. Therefore, inhibition of IL-8 production would lead to a direct reduction in neutrophil infiltration.
  • both IL-6 and IL-8 are produced during rhinovirus (HRV) infections and contribute to the pathogenesis of the common cold and exacerbation of asthma associated with HRV infection [Turner et al., Clin. Infec. Dis., 1997, 26, 840; Grunberg et al., Am. J. Crit. Care Med., 1997, 155, 1362; Zhu et al., J. Clin. Invest, 1996, 97, 421]. It has also been demonstrated in vitro that infection of pulmonary epithelial cells (which represent the primary site of infection by HRV) with HRV results in production of IL-6 and IL-8 [Sabauste et al., J. Clin.
  • p38 inhibitors of the invention may be used for the treatment or prophylaxis of the common cold or respiratory viral infection caused by human rhinovirus infection (HRV), other enteroviruses, coronavirus, influenza virus, parainfluenza virus, respiratory syncytial virus or adenovirus infection.
  • HRV human rhinovirus infection
  • compositions which comprises a compound of formula (1 ) together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients or diluents.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may take a form suitable for oral, buccal, parenteral, nasal, topical, ophthalmic or rectal administration, or a form suitable for administration by inhalation or insufflation.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets, lozenges or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g. pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g. lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogenphosphate); lubricants (e.g. magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g. potato starch or sodium glycollate); or wetting agents (e.g. sodium lauryl sulphate).
  • binding agents e.g. pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • fillers e.g. lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogenphosphate
  • lubricants e.g. magnesium stearate, talc or silica
  • disintegrants e.g. potato starch or sodium glycollate
  • Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents, emulsifying agents, non-aqueous vehicles and preservatives.
  • the preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavouring, colouring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
  • Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
  • compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
  • the compounds of formula (1 ) may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g. by bolus injection or infusion.
  • Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g. in glass ampoules or multi-dose containers, e.g. glass vials.
  • the compositions for injection may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilising, preserving and/or dispersing agents.
  • the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g. sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • the compounds of formula (1 ) may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long-acting formulations may be administered by implantation or by intramuscular injection.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation for pressurised packs or a nebuliser, with the use of suitable propellant, e.g. dichlorodifluoromethane, trichloro- fluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas or mixture of gases.
  • suitable propellant e.g. dichlorodifluoromethane, trichloro- fluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas or mixture of gases.
  • compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active ingredient.
  • the pack or dispensing device may be accompanied by instructions for administration.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated in a suitable ointment containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • Particular carriers include, for example, mineral oil, liquid petroleum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, emulsifying wax and water.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be formulated in a suitable lotion containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • Particular carriers include, for example, mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol and water.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated as microionized suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, either with or without a preservative such as a bactericidal or fungicidal agent, for example phenylmercuric nitrate, benzylalkonium chloride or chlorhexidine acetate.
  • a preservative such as a bactericidal or fungicidal agent, for example phenylmercuric nitrate, benzylalkonium chloride or chlorhexidine acetate.
  • a bactericidal or fungicidal agent for example phenylmercuric nitrate, benzylalkonium chloride or chlorhexidine acetate.
  • ointment such as petrolatum.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated as suppositories. These can be prepared by mixing the active component with a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at room temperature but liquid at rectal temperature and so will melt in the rectum to release the active component.
  • suitable non-irritating excipient include for example cocoa butter, beeswax and polyethylene glycols.
  • the quantity of a compound of the invention required for the prophylaxis or treatment of a particular condition will vary depending on the compound chosen, and the condition of the patient to be treated. In general, however, daily dosages may range from around 100 ng/kg to 100 mg/kg, e.g. around 0.01 mg/kg to 40 mg/kg body weight, for oral or buccal administration, from around 10 ng/kg to 50 mg/kg body weight for parenteral administration, and around 0.05 mg to around 1000 mg, e.g. around 0.5 mg to around 1000 mg, for nasal administration or administration by inhalation or insufflation.
  • the compounds of the invention may be prepared by a number of processes as generally described below and more specifically in the Examples hereinafter.
  • a compound of formula (1) in which Y is a -C(O)- group may be prepared from a carboxylic acid of formula (2) or ester of formula (5) according to amide bond forming reactions well known to those skilled in the art.
  • Such reactions are set forth in references such as March's Advanced Organic Chemistry (John Wiley and Sons 1992), Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1992) and Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-8, 1984, and volumes 1-11 , 1994 (Pergamon). Examples of such methods that may be employed to give compounds of formula (1a) are set out, but not limited to the reactions, in Scheme 1 and Scheme 2 below.
  • amides of formula (1a) may be formed by reaction of a carboxylate salt of formula (2) [where M + is metal counterion such as a sodium or lithium ion or is alternatively an ammonium or trialkylammonium counterion] with an amine of formula (3) in the presence of a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, e.g. 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) or ⁇ /, ⁇ /'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, optionally in the presence of a base such as an amine, e.g. triethylamine or /V-methylmorpholine.
  • a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, e.g. 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) or ⁇ /, ⁇ /'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimi
  • a solvent such as an amide solvent, e.g. ⁇ /, ⁇ /-dimethyl- formamide (DMF), or an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, or a halogenated solvent such as dichloromethane, at around ambient temperature to 60°C.
  • amide solvent e.g. ⁇ /, ⁇ /-dimethyl- formamide (DMF)
  • an ether e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane
  • a halogenated solvent such as dichloromethane
  • a pentafluorophenyl ester of formula (4) may be prepared by reaction of a carboxylic acid of formula (2) with pentafluorophenol in the presence of a coupling reagent such as 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide in a solvent such as an amide solvent, e.g. DMF, at around ambient temperature.
  • a coupling reagent such as 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide
  • a solvent such as an amide solvent, e.g. DMF
  • Amides of formula (1a) can then be prepared by reaction of the pentafluorophenyl ester with amines of formula (3) in an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g.
  • the intermediate acids of formula (2) may be prepared by hydrolysis of esters of formula (5) using a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. sodium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide, in water and a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol such as ethanol at a temperature from around ambient to reflux.
  • a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. sodium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide
  • a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol such as ethanol at a temperature from around ambient to reflux.
  • Amides of formula (1 a) can also be prepared directly from esters of formula (5) by heating with an amine of formula (3) up to the reflux temperature of the amine optionally in the presence of a solvent such as 2-ethoxyethanol either at atmospheric pressure or under pressure in a sealed tube (Scheme 2).
  • the intermediate esters of formula (5) may be prepared by the methods set out in Scheme 3 below. In the Scheme the preparation of an ethyl ester is specifically shown, but it will be appreciated that other esters may be obtained by simply varying the ester starting material and if appropriate any reaction conditions.
  • a compound of formula (5a) or (5b) may be prepared by reaction of a compound of formula (6) or (7) with an amine ArNH 2 in the presence of a palladium catalyst.
  • the reaction may be conveniently carried out in a solvent such as toluene at an elevated temperature, e.g. the reflux temperature, using a catalyst such as tris(dibenzylideneacetone)- dipalladium(O), a phosphine ligand such as 2,2'-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1'- binaphthyl, and a base such as caesium carbonate.
  • a catalyst such as tris(dibenzylideneacetone)- dipalladium(O)
  • a phosphine ligand such as 2,2'-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1'- binaphthyl
  • a base such as caesium carbonate.
  • Intermediates of formula (7) may be prepared by reaction of a compound of formula (8) with an alkylating agent of formula Cy 1 (Alk 1 ) n Z, where Z is a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a sulphonyloxy group such as an alkylsulphonyloxy, e.g. trifluoromethylsulphonyloxy, or arylsulphonyloxy, e.g. phenylsulphonyloxy, group.
  • Z is a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a sulphonyloxy group such as an alkylsulphonyloxy, e.g. trifluoromethylsulphonyloxy, or arylsulphonyloxy, e.g. phenylsulphonyloxy,
  • the reaction may be performed in the presence of a solvent, for example a substituted amide such as ⁇ /, ⁇ /-dimethylformamide, optionally in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as sodium hydride, or an organic base such as an organic amine, e.g. a cyclic amine such as 1 ,5- diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, or a resin-bound organic amine such as resin- bound 2-tert-butylimino-2-diethylamino-1 ,3-dimethylperhydro-1 ,3,2-diaza- phosphorine (PS-BEMP), at an elevated temperature, for example 80 to 100°C.
  • a solvent for example a substituted amide such as ⁇ /, ⁇ /-dimethylformamide
  • a base for example an inorganic base such as sodium hydride, or an organic base such as an organic amine, e.g. a cyclic amine such as 1 ,
  • Intermediates of formula (6) may be prepared by the reaction of a compound of formula (8) with a boronic acid of formula Cy 1 B(OH)2 in which Cy 1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • the reaction may be performed in an organic solvent, for example a halogenated hydrocarbon such as dichloromethane or dichloroethane, in the presence of a copper reagent, for example a copper(l) salt such as Cul, or for example a copper(ll) reagent such as copper(ll) acetate, optionally in the presence of an oxidant, for example 2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidine-1 -oxide or pyridine-/V-oxide, optionally in the presence of a base, for example an organic amine such as an alkylamine, e.g.
  • the reactions just described may be carried out in the reverse order so that the amination using ArNH 2 is performed first with the intermediate of formula (8) followed by alkylation/arylation to yield the compound of formula (5). It may be necessary to protect the nitrogen function of compounds of formula (8) during the course of these reactions. Such protection may be achieved by O- alkylation with an alkyl halide, e.g. cyclopropylmethyl bromide, or an arylalkyl bromide, e.g. benzyl bromide, as shown in Scheme 4.
  • an alkyl halide e.g. cyclopropylmethyl bromide
  • an arylalkyl bromide e.g. benzyl bromide
  • the O-alkylation reaction may be performed in an organic solvent such as DMF in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as Cs 2 C0 3 or an organic base such as an amine, e.g. a cyclic amine such as 1 ,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, at an elevated temperature, e.g. 80 to 100°C, to give a compound of formula (13).
  • Reaction of the protected compound (13) with ArNH 2 under palladium catalysis can then be performed as previously described to give a compound of formula (14). Deprotection can then be achieved by treating a solution of this compound in an alcohol, e.g.
  • Intermediate pyridinones of formula (8) may be prepared from pyridine N- oxides of formula (9) by sequential reaction with an anhydride, for example acetic anhydride, at an elevated temperature, for example the reflux temperature, followed by reaction with an inorganic base, for example a carbonate such as aqueous potassium carbonate, in a solvent such as an ether, for example a cyclic ether, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, at around ambient temperature.
  • anhydride for example acetic anhydride
  • an inorganic base for example a carbonate such as aqueous potassium carbonate
  • a solvent such as an ether
  • a cyclic ether e.g. tetrahydrofuran
  • Pyridine /V-oxides of formula (9) may be formed by oxidation of pyridines of formula (10) using an oxidising agent such as hydrogen peroxide in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid, at an elevated temperature, for example around 70°C to 80°C, or alternatively by reaction with a peracid such as peracetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, or an alcohol, e.g. tert- butanol, at a temperature from the ambient temperature to the reflux temperature.
  • an oxidising agent such as hydrogen peroxide in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid, at an elevated temperature, for example around 70°C to 80°C, or alternatively by reaction with a peracid such as peracetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethan
  • a bromide of formula (10) may be prepared by treatment of an aryl amine of formula (11) with an alkyl nitrite, for example tert-butyl nitrite, and a copper salt, for example copper(ll) bromide, in the presence of a solvent, for example a nitrile such as acetonitrile, at a temperature from about 0° to around 65°C.
  • a solvent for example a nitrile such as acetonitrile
  • Amines of formula (11) may be formed from 2-halopyridine-3-carbonitriles of formula (12) by reaction with a reagent such as ethyl 2-mercaptoacetate.
  • the reaction may be performed in the presence of a solvent such as a substituted amide, for example V, ⁇ /-dimethylformamide, or an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol such as ethanol, in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as sodium carbonate or a hydride, e.g.
  • esters of formula (5a) may be prepared by the reactions set out in Scheme 5.
  • R 20 represents an ester or nitrile and LG represents a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. chlorine or bromine, or a sulfonyloxy group such as an alkylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy, or an arylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. p- toluenesulfonyloxy.
  • a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. chlorine or bromine
  • a sulfonyloxy group such as an alkylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy, or an arylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. p- toluenesulfonyloxy.
  • a compound of formula (17) or (18), where Rx is an optionally substituted alkyl group, e.g. methyl, and W is a hydrogen atom, metal ion or amine salt may be reacted with a thioamide of formula (19).
  • the reaction may be performed in the presence of a base.
  • Appropriate bases may include, but are not limited to, lithium bases such as tj-butyl- or tert-butyllithium or lithium diisopropylamide (LDA), silazanes, e.g.
  • lithium hexamethyldisilazane LiHMDS
  • sodium hexamethyldisilazane NaHMDS
  • carbonates e.g. potassium carbonate
  • alkoxides e.g. sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide or potassium tert-butoxide
  • hydroxides e.g. NaOH
  • hydrides e.g. sodium hydride
  • organic amines e.g. triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine or a cyclic amine such as /V-methylmorpholine or pyridine.
  • the reaction may be performed in an organic solvent such as an amide, e.g.
  • a substituted amide such as ⁇ /,V-dimethylformamide
  • an ether e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane
  • an alcohol e.g. methanol, ethanol or propanol, or acetonitrile
  • the reaction is achieved using an alkoxide base, especially sodium ethoxide or sodium methoxide, in an alcoholic solvent, especially ethanol, at reflux temperature.
  • Intermediates of formula (17), where not commercially available may be prepared using standard methodology (see, for example, Mir Hedayatullah, J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1981 , 18, 339).
  • intermediates of formula (18), where not commercially available may be prepared using standard methodology. For example, they may be prepared in situ by reaction of an acetate, e.g. ethyl acetate, with a base such as sodium methoxide followed by addition of a formate, e.g. methyl formate.
  • intermediates of formula (19) may be prepared using methods known to those skilled in the art (see, for example, Adhikari et al., Aust J. Chem., 1999, 52, 63-67).
  • an isothiocyanate of formula Cy 1 NCS may be reacted with acetonitrile in the presence of a base, e.g. NaHMDS, in a suitable solvent, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, optionally at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C.
  • a base e.g. NaHMDS
  • a suitable solvent e.g. tetrahydrofuran
  • the intermediate of formula (19) may be prepared in situ, for example using the methods as described herein, followed by subsequent addition of a compound of formula (17) or (18).
  • an intermediate of formula (20) may be formed. If desired the intermediate may be isolated at the end of step (A) and subsequently reacted with intermediate (21 ) to form the desired amine (22). In some instances, however, it may advantageous not to isolate the intermediate of formula (20) and reaction (B) may be carried out directly with the reaction mixture of step (A).
  • step (A) may be used in the next stage or they may be purified, for example by crystallisation, to yield an isolated intermediate, such as a compound of formula (20).
  • an intermediate of formula (21 ) may then be added to the reaction mixture or to the crude solids or purified product from step (A) in a suitable solvent.
  • suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, amides, e.g. a substituted amide such as A/,A/-dimethylformamide, alcohols, e.g. ethanol, methanol or isopropyl alcohol, ethers, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, and acetonitrile.
  • the reaction may be performed at a temperature from ambient up to the reflux temperature.
  • the intermediate of formula (24) may be converted to a compound of formula (22) using the methods described above. In this situation it may be necessary to add a base, in order for the reaction to proceed to completion.
  • Appropriate bases include carbonates, e.g. caesium or potassium carbonate, alkoxides, e.g. potassium tert-butoxide, hydrides, e.g. sodium hydride, or organic amines, e.g. triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine or cyclic amines such as /V-methylmorpholine or pyridine.
  • Amines of formula (22) can be converted to bromides of formula (23) by standard methods such as for example by the Sandmeyer reaction as previously described for compounds of formula (11 ).
  • Compounds of formula (5a) can then be prepared from these bromides by the palladium-catalysed amination reactions already described.
  • intermediates of formula (21), where not commercially available, may be prepared using standard methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • alcohol groups may be converted into leaving groups, such as halogen atoms or sulfonyloxy groups, using conditions known to the skilled artisan.
  • an alcohol may be reacted with thionyl chloride in a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g., dichloromethane, to yield the corresponding chloride.
  • a base e.g. triethylamine, may also be used in the reaction.
  • This reaction may be performed by hydrolysis of the nitrile (23a) with a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. a 2M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide in an alcoholic solvent such as methanol or ethanol at reflux.
  • a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. a 2M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide in an alcoholic solvent such as methanol or ethanol at reflux.
  • intermediates such as intermediates (17), (18), (19) or (21 ), if not available commercially, may also be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, volumes 1-15 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989), Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, volumes 1-19 (John Wiley and Sons, 1999), Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-8, 1984, and volumes 1-11 , 1994 (Pergamon), Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-7, 1995 (Pergamon), Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed.
  • amides of formula (1a) may be prepared by the reactions detailed in Scheme 6 below.
  • acids of formula (25) or (25a) may be converted to amides of formula (27) by reaction with amines of formula (3) in the presence of coupling reagents in the same way as previously described for the conversion of compounds (2) to amides of formula (1a).
  • the carboxylic acids may be converted to acid chlorides of formula (26) by reaction with a chlorinating agent such as oxalyl chloride optionally in the presence of a catalytic amount of DMF in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, or an ether, e.g.
  • a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at around ambient temperature; or with a chlorinating agent such as thionyl chloride, typically in a solvent such as toluene, at the reflux temperature.
  • the resultant acid chlorides may then be reacted with amines of formula (3) in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, in the presence of an amine base such as triethylamine at around ambient temperature to give amides of formula (27).
  • Amides of formula (1a) may then be prepared from amides of formula (27) using a palladium-catalysed arylation procedure previously described in Scheme 1.
  • R d substituents may be present.
  • Conventional protecting groups may be used in accordance with standard practice [see, for example, Greene, T. W. in “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley and Sons, 1999].
  • deprotection may be the final step in the synthesis of a compound of formula (1a) and the processes according to the invention described hereinafter are to be understood to extend to such removal of protecting groups.
  • a compound of formula (1 ) in which Y is an -S(0) 2 - group may be prepared by the route set out in Scheme 7.
  • a compound of formula (29) can be obtained by reaction of a compound of formula (28) with a metal amide base such as sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature of around 0°C and then adding di-tert- butyl dicarbonate in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and stirring at ambient temperature.
  • a compound of formula (1 ) can then be prepared by the following reaction sequence.
  • a compound of formula (29) is treated with a base such as an alkyl lithium, e.g. n-butyllithium, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g.
  • a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature of around -78°C.
  • Sulfur dioxide gas is bubbled through the reaction mixture before allowing the reaction to warm to room temperature.
  • Solvents are removed in vacuo and the crude material dissolved in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, and the mixture treated with a chlorinating reagent such as ⁇ /-chlorosuccinimide at around ambient temperature.
  • a sulphonamide of formula (1) can then be prepared by treating a compound of formula (30) with an acid, e.g. a mineral acid such as HCl or an organic acid such as trifluoroacetic acid, in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane.
  • Intermediates of formula (28) may be obtained by decarboxylation of compounds of formula (2) with an acid such as a mineral acid, e.g. HCl, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, at a temperature from 50°C up to the reflux temperature.
  • aromatic halogen substituents in the compounds may be subjected to halogen-metal exchange with a base, for example a lithium base such as n-butyl- or tert-butyllithium, optionally at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C, in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and then quenched with an electrophile to introduce a desired substituent.
  • a base for example a lithium base such as n-butyl- or tert-butyllithium, optionally at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C, in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and then quenched with an electrophile to introduce a desired substituent.
  • a formyl group may be introduced by using ⁇ /, ⁇ /-dimethylformamide as the electrophile
  • a thiomethyl group may be introduced by using dimethyldisulphide as the electrophile
  • an alcohol group may be introduced by using an aldehyde as the electrophile
  • an acid may be introduced by using carbon dioxide as the electrophile.
  • Aromatic acids of formula ArC0 2 H may also be generated by quenching Grignard reagents of formula ArMgHal with carbon dioxide.
  • Aromatic acids of formula ArC0 2 H generated by this method and acid- containing compounds in general may be converted to activated derivatives, e.g. acid halides, by reaction with a halogenating agent such as a thionyl halide, e.g. thionyl chloride, a phosphorus trihalide such as phosphorus trichloride, or a phosphorus pentahalide such as phosphorus pentachloride, optionally in an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, or a chlorinated hydrocarbon, e.g.
  • a halogenating agent such as a thionyl halide, e.g. thionyl chloride, a phosphorus trihalide such as phosphorus trichloride, or a phosphorus pentahalide such as phosphorus pentachloride
  • an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. tol
  • dichloromethane at a temperature from about 0°C to the reflux temperature, or may be converted into Weinreb amides of formula ArC(0)N(OMe)Me by conversion to the acid halide as just described and subsequent reaction with an amine of formula HN(OMe)Me or a salt thereof, optionally in the presence of a base such as an organic amine, e.g. triethylamine, in an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, or a chlorinated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a temperature from about 0°C to ambient temperature.
  • a base such as an organic amine, e.g. triethylamine
  • an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, or a chlorinated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a temperature from about 0°C to ambient temperature.
  • Ester groups such as -C0 2 Alk 6 and -C0 2 R 4 in the compound of formula (1 ) and intermediates thereto may be converted to the corresponding acid [-C0 2 H] by acid- or base-catalysed hydrolysis depending on the nature of the group Alk 6 or R 4 .
  • Acid- or base-catalysed hydrolysis may be achieved for example by treatment with an organic or inorganic acid, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid, in an organic solvent, e.g. dichloromethane, or a mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid in a solvent such as 1 ,4-dioxane, or an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. lithium hydroxide, in an aqueous alcohol, e.g. aqueous methanol.
  • an organic or inorganic acid e.g. trifluoroacetic acid
  • an organic solvent e.g. dichloromethane
  • a mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid
  • -OR 6 [where R 6 represents an alkyl group such as methyl] in compounds of formula (1) and intermediates thereto may be cleaved to the corresponding alcohol -OH by reaction with boron tribromide in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C.
  • a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane
  • Alcohol [-OH] groups may also be obtained by hydrogenation of a corresponding -OCH 2 R 31 group (where R 31 is an aryl group) using a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon in a solvent such as ethanol in the presence of ammonium formate, cyclohexadiene or hydrogen, from around ambient to the reflux temperature.
  • a metal catalyst for example palladium
  • -OH groups may be generated from the corresponding ester [e.g. -C0 2 Alk 6 ] or aldehyde [-CHO] by reduction, using for example a complex metal hydride such as lithium aluminium hydride or sodium borohydride in a solvent such as methanol.
  • alcohol [-OH] groups in the compounds may be converted to a corresponding -OR 6 group by coupling with a reagent R 6 OH in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran in the presence of a phosphine, e.g. triphenylphosphine, and an activator such as diethyl, diisopropyl or dimethyl azodicarboxylate.
  • a phosphine e.g. triphenylphosphine
  • an activator such as diethyl, diisopropyl or dimethyl azodicarboxylate.
  • Aminosulphonylamino [-NHSO 2 NH 2 ] groups in the compounds may be obtained, in another example, by reaction of a corresponding amine [-NH2] with sulphamide in the presence of an organic base such as pyridine at an elevated temperature, e.g. the reflux temperature.
  • compounds containing a -NHCSR 7 or -CSNHR 7 group may be prepared by treating a corresponding compound containing a -NHCOR 7 or -CONHR 7 group with a thiation reagent, such as Lawesson's Reagent or P 2 S 5 , in an anhydrous solvent, for example a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at an elevated temperature such as the reflux temperature.
  • a thiation reagent such as Lawesson's Reagent or P 2 S 5
  • amine [-NH 2 ] groups may be alkylated using a reductive alkylation process employing an aldehyde and a reducing agent.
  • Suitable reducing agents include borohydrides, for example sodium triacetoxyborohyride or sodium cyanoborohydride.
  • the reduction may be carried out in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, a ketone such as acetone, or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, where necessary in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid at around ambient temperature.
  • the amine and aldehyde may be initially reacted in a solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, and then subjected to hydrogenation in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon, in a solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
  • amine [-NH 2 ] groups in compounds of formula (1 ) and intermediates thereto may be obtained by hydrolysis from a corresponding imide by reaction with hydrazine in a solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, at ambient temperature.
  • a solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. ethanol
  • a nitro [-N0 2 ] group may be reduced to an amine [-NH 2 ], for example by catalytic hydrogenation using for example hydrogen in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or by chemical reduction using for example a metal, e.g. tin or iron, in the presence of an acid such as hydrochloric acid.
  • a metal catalyst for example palladium
  • amine [-CH 2 NH 2 ] groups in compounds of formula (1) and intermediates thereto may be obtained by reduction of nitriles [-CN], for example by catalytic hydrogenation using for example hydrogen in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium on a support such as carbon, or Raney ® nickel, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol or ethanol, optionally in the presence of ammonia solution at a temperature from ambient to the reflux temperature, or by chemical reduction using for example a metal hydride, e.g.
  • sulphur atoms in the compounds may be oxidised to the corresponding sulphoxide or sulphone using an oxidising agent such as a peroxyacid, e.g. 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid, in an inert solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at around ambient temperature.
  • a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran
  • an oxidising agent such as a peroxyacid, e.g. 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid
  • an inert solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane
  • ⁇ /-oxides of compounds of formula (1 ) may in general be prepared for example by oxidation of the corresponding nitrogen base as described above in relation to the preparation of intermediates of formula (5).
  • Salts of compounds of formula (1 ) may be prepared by reaction of compounds of formula (1 ) with an appropriate base in a suitable solvent or mixture of solvents, e.g. an organic solvent such as an ether, e.g. diethyl ether, or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, using conventional procedures.
  • a suitable solvent or mixture of solvents e.g. an organic solvent such as an ether, e.g. diethyl ether, or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, using conventional procedures.
  • diastereomeric derivatives e.g. salts
  • diastereomeric derivatives may be produced by reaction of a mixture of enantiomers of formula (1 ), e.g. a racemate, and an appropriate chiral compound, e.g. a chiral base.
  • the diastereomers may then be separated by any convenient means, for example by crystallisation, and the desired enantiomer recovered, e.g. by treatment with an acid in the instance where the diastereomer is a salt.
  • a racemate of formula (1) may be separated using chiral High Performance Liquid Chromatography.
  • a particular enantiomer may be obtained by using an appropriate chiral intermediate in one of the processes described above.
  • a particular enantiomer may be obtained by performing an enantiomer-specific enzymatic biotransformation, e.g. an ester hydrolysis using an esterase, and then purifying only the enantiomerically pure hydrolysed acid from the unreacted ester antipode.
  • HOBT 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate
  • BINAP 2,2'-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1-1'-binaphthyl
  • Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (1.21g, 1.32mmol) was added to a mixture of Intermediate 5 (10g, 26.4mmol), caesium carbonate (12.05g, 37.0mmol), 2,4-difluoroaniline (4.1g, 3.23mL, 31.7mmol) and BINAP (1.65g, 2.64mmol) in anhydrous toluene (80mL) and the reaction heated to reflux under nitrogen for 4 days. The reaction was cooled, partitioned between DCM and water and the organic phase dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated in vacuo. The crude residue was triturated with methanol to give the title compound as a white solid (9.87g).
  • the Intermediate esters 14-26 were prepared following a procedure similar to that described for Intermediate 13. Therefore to an oven dried reaction flask was added a magnetic stirrer, the appropriate substituted aniline (1.2 equiv.), anhydrous toluene, Intermediate 5 (1.0 equiv.), caesium carbonate (1.4equiv.), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (5 mol %) and BINAP (10 mol %). The reactions were heated to reflux under nitrogen and with magnetic stirring for 24-48 h. Each reaction was then diluted with DCM, washed with water, dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude products were either purified on silica eluting with a gradient of EtOAc in DCM or alternatively by trituration with methanol or ethyl acetate to give the title compounds as solids.
  • Acetonitrile (10mL) was added to a solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (100mL, 1.0M in THF, lOOmmol) in THF (50mL) at -78°C to give a thick white precipitate.
  • 2-Chlorophenyl isothiocyanate (7.72g, 45.45mmol) was added to give a brown solution.
  • the mixture was allowed to warm to r.t. over 1 h then diluted with EtOH (50mL).
  • ⁇ /, ⁇ /-Dimethyluracil (6.4g, 45mmol) was added and the mixture heated at reflux for 24 h. Volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in acetonitrile (100mL).
  • Example 4 3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(r(2/?)-2-(hvdroxymethv ⁇ pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-7-(4-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one
  • the title compound was prepared from Intermediate 48 (1.14g, 2.0mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (470mg, 46%).
  • Example 19 3-Anilino-2-fr(2ffl-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-v ⁇ carbonyl -7- phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
  • the title compound was prepared from Intermediate 29 and (R)-2- (methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid.
  • the title compound was prepared from 3-hydroxyazetidine hydrochloride (110mg, 1.05mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) with the addition of diisopropylethylamine (0.195mL, 1.12mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as a white solid (64mg).
  • the title compound was prepared from 2-[(2S)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]propan-2-ol (140mg, 1.05mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (140mg).
  • Examples 42-53 were all prepared from the appropriate pentafluorophenyl ester intermediate and amine starting materials following the method described for Example 41. Where necessary reactions were run in the presence of a tertiary amine base such as triethylamine to neutralise acid salts of the starting materials.
  • a tertiary amine base such as triethylamine to neutralise acid salts of the starting materials.
  • Example 46 rac-3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-r(3-hydroxypiperidin-1-yl)carbonvn- 7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7f -one Prepared from Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.36mmol), 3-hydroxypiperidine hydrochloride (98mg, 0.70mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (101 mg, 0.78mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (silica, 15% THF in DCM) gave the title compound as a white solid (137mg).
  • Example 68 (111 mg, 0.23mmol), paraformaldehyde (70mg, 0.56mmol) and sodium cyanoborohydride (36mg, 0.54mmol) in MeOH (10mL) were stirred at r.t. for 18 h.
  • the reaction mixture was acidified using aq HCl (2N) and stirred for 20 min.
  • the acidic mixture was neutralised with 10% aq. NaOH and extracted with DCM.
  • the DCM extract was dried (Na 2 S0 ) and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the crude product was purified by chromatography (silica, 2% MeOH in DCM) to give the title compound as an off-white solid (30mg, 25%).
  • Bound protein was eluted by 150mM imidazole in PBS (after a wash with 15mM imidazole in PBS) and directly applied to a HiTrap QTM column (AP Biotech). Bound protein was eluted using a 20 column volume, 0 to 1 M NaCl gradient. Fractions containing (His)6-p38 were aliquotted and stored at -70°C prior to their activation.
  • E. coli BL21 pLysS expressing the constitutively activated form of human MKK6 fused with an ⁇ /-terminal glutathione-S-transferase tag (GST- MKK6EE) were harvested by centrifugation and frozen at -70°C.
  • Cells were lysed by resuspension in 1/10th the culture volume of PBS containing Complete, EDTA-freeTM protease inhibitors followed by sonication on ice for 4 x 15 sec. Cell debris was removed by centrifugation at 35,000 x g and the resultant supernatant stored in aliquots at -70°C.
  • the inhibition of p38 catalysed phosphorylation of biotinylated MBP is measured using a DELFIA based format.
  • the assay was performed in a buffer comprising 20mM HEPES (pH 7.4), 5mM MgCI 2 and 3mM DTT.
  • biotinylated MBP 2.5 ⁇ M was incubated at room temperature in a streptavidin-coated microtitre plate together with activated gst-p38 (10nM) and ATP (1 ⁇ M) in the presence of a range of inhibitor concentrations (final concentration of DMSO is 2 percent). After fifteen minutes the reaction was terminated by the addition of EDTA (75mM).
  • microtitre plate was then washed with Tris buffered saline (TBS), prior to the addition of 100 ⁇ l of anti-phospho MBP antibody (mouse) together with europium-labeled anti-mouse IgG antibody. After one hour at room temperature the plate was again washed in TBS followed by the addition of Enhancement solution (PerkinElmer Wallac). Fluorescence measurements were performed after a further fifteen minutes at room temperature.
  • TBS Tris buffered saline
  • Enhancement solution PerkinElmer Wallac
  • IC50 values are determined from the plot of log inhibitor concentration (x- axis) versus percentage inhibition of the fluorescence generated by a control sample in the absence of inhibitor (y-axis).
  • PBMC Peripheral blood mononuclear cells
  • Inhibitor stocks (20mM) were kept as a frozen solution (-20°C) in DMSO. Serial dilutions of inhibitors were performed in DMSO as 250-times concentrated stocks. Inhibitors were diluted 1 in 250 into tissue culture media, prewarmed to 37°C and transferred to plates containing PBMC. PBMC and inhibitors were incubated together for 30 min prior to addition of LPS. Inhibitors used in whole blood assays were prepared according to a different regime. Using the same stock solution serial dilutions of inhibitors were performed in DMSO. Inhibitors were then diluted 1 in 500 straight into whole blood in a volume of 1 ⁇ L. Inhibitor was incubated with whole blood for 30 min prior to the addition of LPS.
  • LPS stimulation of PBMC PBMC were resuspended at a density of 2 x 10 5 cells/well in flat bottomed 96-well tissue culture treated plates. After the addition of inhibitor cells were stimulated with an optimal dose of LPS (E coli strain B5:055, Sigma, at a final concentration of 1 ⁇ g ml "1 ) and incubated at 37°C in 5% C0 /95% air for 18 hours. TNF- levels were measured from cell free supernatants by sandwich ELISA (BioSource #CHC1751 ).
  • mice Male Lewis rats (180-200g) are anaesthetised with Isofluor and injected i.v. with LPS* in a volume of 0.5ml sterile saline. After 90 minutes blood is collected into EDTA tubes for preparation of plasma samples. Plasma is stored at -70°C prior to assay for TNF- ⁇ by commercial ELISA.
  • Female Lewis rats (180-200g) are anaesthetised with Isofluor and immunised i.d. at the base of the tail with 2 x 100 ⁇ l of emulsion containing 4mg/ml bovine collagen II in 0.01 M acetic acid and Freund's Incomplete Adjuvant at a ratio of 1 :1.
  • a polyarthritis develops with onset from about 13 days post sensitisation. The disease is mainly confined to the ankles and is quantified by plethysmometry. Results are expressed as change in paw volume over time.
  • compounds of the invention have IC 50 values of around 1 ⁇ M and below.
  • the compounds of the invention are clearly potent inhibitors of p38 kinase, especially p38 ⁇ kinase.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Oxygen Or Sulfur (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

A series of thieno[2,3-b]pyridin-6(7H)-one derivatives, substituted in the 2-position by a carbonyl- or sulfonyl-linked pyrrolidin-1-yl or related moiety, being inhibitors of p38 MAP kinase, are accordingly of use in medicine, for example in the treatment and/or prevention of immune or inflammatory disorders.

Description

THIENOPYR1DONE DERIVATIVES AS KINASE INHIBITORS
This invention relates to a series of thienopyridone derivatives, to compositions containing them, to processes for their preparation and to their use in medicine.
Immune and inflammatory responses involve a variety of cell types with control and co-ordination of the various interactions occurring via both cell- cell contacts (e.g. integrin interactions with their receptors) and by way of intercellular signalling molecules. A large number of different signalling molecules are involved, including cytokines, lymphocytes, chemokines and growth factors.
Cells respond to such intercellular signalling molecules by means of intracellular signalling mechanisms that include protein kinases, phosphatases and phospholipases. There are five classes of protein kinase of which the major ones are the tyrosine kinases and the serine/threonine kinases [Hunter, T., Methods in Enzymology (Protein Kinase Classification), p. 3, Hunter, T. and Sefton, B.M. eds., vol. 200, Academic Press, San Diego, 1991].
One sub-class of serine/threonine kinases is the mitogen activating protein (MAP) kinases of which there are at least three families which differ in the sequence and size of the activation loop [Adams, J. L. et al., Progress in Medicinal Chemistry, pp. 1-60, King, F. D. and Oxford, A. W. eds., vol. 38, Elsevier Science, 2001]: (i) the extracellular regulated kinases (ERKs); (ii) the c-Jun NH2 terminal kinases or stress activated kinases (JNKs or SAP kinases); and (iii) the p38 kinases which have a threonine-glycine-tyrosine (TGY) activation motif. Both the JNKs and p38 MAP kinases are primarily activated by stress stimuli including, but not limited to, proinflammatory cytokines, e.g. tumour necrosis factor (TNF) and interleukin-1 (IL-1 ), ultraviolet light, endotoxin and chemical or osmotic shock.
Four isoforms of p38 have been described (p38α/β/γ/δ). The human p38α enzyme was initially identified as a target of cytokine-suppressive anti- inflammatory drugs (CSAIDs) and the two isoenzymes found were initially termed CSAID binding protein-1 (CSBP-1 ) and CSBP-2 [Lee, J. C. et al., Nature (London), 1994, 372, 739-46]. CSBP-2 is now widely referred to as p38α and differs from CSBP-1 in an internal sequence of 25 amino acids as a result of differential splicing of two exons that are conserved in both mouse and human [McDonnell, P. C. et al., Genomics, 1995, 29, 301-2]. CSBP-1 and p38α are expressed ubiquitously and there is no difference between the two isoforms with respect to tissue distribution, activation profile, substrate preference or CSAID binding. A second isoform is p38β which has 70% identity with p38α. A second form of p38β termed p38β2 is also known and of the two this is believed to be the major form. p38α and p38β2 are expressed in many different tissues. However in monocytes and macrophages p38α is the predominant kinase activity [Lee, J. C, ibid; Jing, Y. et al., J. Biol. Chem., 1996, 271 , 10531-34; Hale, K. K. et al., J. Immun., 1999, 162, 4246-52]. p38γ and p38δ (also termed SAP kinase-3 and SAP kinase-4 respectively) have -63% and -61 % homology to p38α respectively. p38γ is predominantly expressed in skeletal muscle whilst p38δ is found in testes, pancreas, prostate, small intestine and in certain endocrine tissues.
All p38 homologues and splice variants contain a 12 amino acid activation loop that includes a Thr-Gly-Tyr motif. Dual phosphorylation of both Thr-180 and Tyr-182 in the TGY motif by a dual specificity upstream kinase is essential for the activation of p38 and results in a >1000-fold increase in specific activity of these enzymes [Doza, Y. N. et al., FEBS Lett., 1995, 364, 7095-8012]. This dual phosphorylation is effected by MKK6 and under certain conditions the related enzyme MKK3 [Enslen, H. et al., J. Biol. Chem., 1998, 273, 1741-48]. MKK3 and MKK6 belong to a family of enzymes termed MAPKK (mitogen activating protein kinase kinase) which are in turn activated by MAPKKK (mitogen activating kinase kinase kinase) otherwise known as MAP3K.
Several MAP3Ks have been identified that are activated by a wide variety of stimuli including environmental stress, inflammatory cytokines and other factors. MEKK4/MTK1 (MAP or ERK kinase kinase/MAP three kinase-1), ASK1 (apoptosis stimulated kinase) and TAK1 (TGF-β-activated kinase) are some of the enzymes identified as upstream activators of MAPKKs. MEKK4/MTK1 is thought to be activated by several GADD-45-like genes that are induced in response to environmental stimuli and which eventually lead to p38 activation [Takekawa, M. and Saito, H., Cell, 1998, 95, 521-30]. TAK1 has been shown to activate MKK6 in response to transforming growth factor- β (TGF-β). TNF-stimulated activation of p38 is believed to be mediated by the recruitment of TRAF2 [TNF receptor associated factor] and the Fas adaptor protein, Daxx, which results in the activation of ASK1 and subsequently p38.
Several substrates of p38 have been identified including other kinases [e.g. MAPK activated protein kinase 2/3/5 (MAPKAP 2/3/5), p38 regulated/activated protein kinase (PRAK), MAP kinase-interacting kinase 1/2 (MNK1/2), mitogen- and stress-activated protein kinase 1 (MSK1/RLPK) and ribosomal S6 kinase-B (RSK-B)]; transcription factors [e.g. activating transcription factor 2/6 (ATF2/6), monocyte-enhancer factor-2A/C (MEF2A C), C/EBP homologous protein (CHOP), Elk1 and Sap-1a1]; and other substrates [e.g. cPLA2, p47phox].
MAPKAP K2 is activated by p38 in response to environmental stress. Mice engineered to lack MAPKAP K2 do not produce TNF in response to lipopolysaccharide (LPS). Production of several other cytokines such as IL- 1 , IL-6, IFN-g and IL-10 is also partially inhibited [Kotlyarov, A. et al., Nature Cell Biol., 1999, 1 , 94-7]. Further, MAPKAP K2 from embryonic stem cells from p38α null mice was not activated in response to stress and these cells did not produce IL-6 in response to IL-1 [Allen, M. et al., J. Exp. Med., 2000, 191 , 859-69]. These results indicate that MAPKAP K2 is not only essential for TNF and IL-1 production but also for signalling induced by cytokines. In addition MAPKAP K2/3 phosphorylate and thus regulate heat shock proteins HSP 25 and HSP 27 which are involved in cytoskeletal reorganization.
Several small molecule inhibitors of p38 have been reported which inhibit IL- 1 and TNF synthesis in human monocytes at concentrations in the low μM range [Lee, J. C. et al., Int. J. Immunopharm., 1988, 10, 835] and exhibit activity in animal models which are refractory to cyclooxygenase inhibitors [Lee, J. C. et al., Annals N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1993, 696, 149]. In addition these small molecule inhibitors are known to decrease the synthesis of a wide variety of pro-inflammatory proteins including IL-6, IL-8, granulocyte/macrophage colony-stimulating factor (GM-CSF) and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2). TNF-induced phosphorylation and activation of cytosolic PLA2, TNF-induced expression of VCAM-1 on endothelial cells and IL-1 stimulated synthesis of collagenase and stromelysin are also inhibited by small molecule inhibitors of p38 [Cohen, P., Trends Cell Biol., 1997, 7, 353- 61].
A variety of cells including monocytes and macrophages produce TNF and IL-1. Excessive or unregulated TNF production is implicated in a number of disease states including Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, pyresis, rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteoarthritis, gouty arthritis and other arthritic conditions, toxic shock syndrome, endotoxic shock, sepsis, septic shock, gram negative sepsis, bone resorption diseases, reperfusion injury, graft vs. host reaction, allograft rejection, adult respiratory distress syndrome, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, silicosis, pulmonary sarcoidosis, cerebral malaria, scar tissue formation, keloid formation, fever and myalgias due to infection, such as influenza, cachexia secondary to acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS), cachexia secondary to infection or malignancy, AIDS or AIDS related complex.
Excessive or unregulated IL-1 production has been implicated in rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, acute synovitis, psoriatic arthritis, cachexia, Reiter's syndrome, endotoxemia, toxic shock syndrome, tuberculosis, atherosclerosis, muscle degeneration, and other acute or chronic inflammatory diseases such as the inflammatory reaction induced by endotoxin or inflammatory bowel disease. In addition IL-1 has been linked to diabetes and pancreatic β cell destruction [Dinarello, C. A., J. Clinical Immunology, 1985, 5, 287-97].
IL-8 is a chemotactic factor produced by various cell types including endothelial cells, mononuclear cells, fibroblasts and keratinocytes. IL-1 , TNF and LPS all induce the production of IL-8 by endothelial cells. In vitro IL-8 has been shown to have a number of functions including being a chemoattractant for neutrophils, T-lymphocytes and basophils. IL-8 has also been shown to increase the surface expression of Mac-1 (CD11 b/CD18) on neutrophils without de novo protein synthesis which may contribute to increased adhesion of neutrophils to vascular endothelial cells. Many diseases are characterised by massive neutrophil infiltration. Histamine release from basophils (in both atopic and normal individuals) is induced by IL-8 as is lysozomal enzyme release and respiratory burst from neutrophils.
The central role of IL-1 and TNF together with other leukocyte derived cytokines as important and critical inflammatory mediators is well documented. The inhibition of these cytokines has been shown or would be expected to be of benefit in controlling, alleviating or reducing many of these disease states.
The central position that p38 occupies within the cascade of signalling molecules mediating extracellular to intracellular signalling and its influence over not only IL-1 , TNF and IL-8 production but also the synthesis and/or action of other pro-inflammatory proteins (e.g. IL-6, GM-CSF, COX-2, collagenase and stromelysin) make it an attractive target for inhibition by small molecule inhibitors with the expectation that such inhibition would be a highly effective mechanism for regulating the excessive and destructive activation of the immune system. Such an expectation is supported by the potent and diverse anti-inflammatory activities described for p38 kinase inhibitors [Adams, ibid; Badger et al., J. Pharm. Exp. Ther., 1996, 279, 1453- 61 ; Griswold et al., Pharmacol. Comm., 1996, 7, 323-29].
We have now found a group of compounds which are potent and selective inhibitors of p38 kinase (p38α, β, δ and γ) and the isoforms and splice variants thereof, especially p38 , p38β and p38β2. The compounds are thus of use in medicine, for example in the prophylaxis and treatment of immune or inflammatory disorders as described herein.
Thus according to one aspect of the invention we provide a compound of formula (1 ):
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein:
Y is a linking group -C(O)- or -S(0)2-; n is zero or the integer 1 ; m is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4; p is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
Rd is an -OH, -(Alk2)OH (where Alk2 is a straight or branched Cι-4 alkylene chain), -OR1 (where R1 is a straight or branched Cι.6 alkyl group), -(Alk2)OR1,
-NR2R3 (where R2 and R3 may be the same or different and is each independently a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched C-ι_6 alkyl group),
-(Alk2)NR2R3 or straight or branched Cι-6 alkyl group;
Alk1 is a straight or branched Cι-4 alkylene chain;
Cy1 is an optionally substituted cycloaliphatic, aromatic or heteroaromatic group; and Ar is an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group; and the salts, solvates, hydrates and Λ/-oxides thereof.
It will be appreciated that compounds of formula (1 ) may have one or more chiral centres, and exist as enantiomers or diastereomers. The invention is to be understood to extend to all such enantiomers, diastereomers and mixtures thereof in any proportion, including racemates. Formula (1) and the formulae hereinafter are intended to represent all individual isomers and mixtures thereof, unless stated or shown otherwise. In addition, compounds of formula (1) may exist as tautomers, for example keto (CH2C=0)-enol (CH=CHOH) tautomers. Formula (1 ) and the formulae hereinafter are intended to represent all individual tautomers and mixtures thereof, unless stated otherwise.
The following general terms as used herein in relation to compounds of the invention and intermediates thereto have the stated meaning below unless specifically defined otherwise. Thus as used herein the term "alkyl" whether present as a group or part of a group includes straight or branched C1-6 alkyl groups, for example C1-4 alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl or terf-butyl groups. Similarly, the terms "alkenyl" or "alkynyl" are intended to mean straight or branched C2-6 alkenyl or C2-6 alkynyl groups such as C2- alkenyl or C2-4 alkynyl groups. The optional substituents which may be present on these groups include one, two, three or more substituents where each substituent may be the same or different and is selected from halogen atoms, e.g. fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms, or -OH, -C02H, -C02R4 [where R4 is an optionally substituted straight or branched Cι-6 alkyl group, and is in particular a straight or branched Cι-4 alkyl group], e.g. -C02CH3 or -C02C(CH3)3, -CONHR4, e.g. -CONHCH3, -CON(R4)2, e.g. -CON(CH3)2, -COR4, e.g. -COCH3, C-ι-6 alkoxy, e.g. methoxy or ethoxy, haloCι-6alkoxy, e.g. trifluoromethoxy or difluoromethoxy, thiol (-SH), -S(0)R4, e.g. -S(O)CH3, -S(O)2R4, e.g. -S(0)2CH3, C-ι-6 alkylthio, e.g. methylthio or ethylthio, amino, -NHR4, e.g. -NHCH3, or -N(R4)2, e.g. -N(CH3)2, groups. Where two R4 groups are present in any of the above substituents these may be the same or different.
In addition when two R4 alkyl groups are present in any of the optional substituents just described these groups may be joined, together with the N atom to which they are attached, to form a heterocyclic ring. Such heterocyclic rings may be optionally interrupted by a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group selected from -0-, -S-, -N(R4)-, -C(O)- or -C(S)- groups. Particular examples of such heterocyclic rings include piperidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl and piperazinyl rings.
The term halogen is intended to include fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms. The term "haloalkyl" is intended to include those alkyl groups just mentioned substituted by one, two or three of the halogen atoms just described. Particular examples of such groups include -CF3, -CCI3, -CHF2, -CHCI2, -CH2F and -CH2CI groups.
The term "alkoxy" as used herein is intended to include straight or branched C1-6 alkoxy, e.g. Cι- alkoxy such as methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, isobutoxy and ferf-butoxy. "Haloalkoxy" as used herein includes any of these alkoxy groups substituted by one, two or three halogen atoms as described above. Particular examples include -OCF3, -OCCI3, -OCHF2, -OCHCI2, -OCH2F and -OCH2CI groups.
As used herein the term "alkylthio" is intended to include straight or branched C-ι-6 alkylthio, e.g. C-1-4 alkylthio such as methylthio or ethylthio.
As used herein the term "alkylamino" or "dialkylamino" is intended to include the groups -NHR1a and -N(R1a)(R1b) where R1a and R1b is each independently an optionally substituted straight or branched alkyl group or both together with the N atom to which they are attached form an optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl group which may contain a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group such as an -O- or -S- atom or -N(R1a)- group. Particular examples of such optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl groups include optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and Λ/-Cι-6alkylpiperazinyl groups. The optional substituents which may be present on such heterocycloalkyl groups include those optional substituents as described above in relation to the term "alkyl".
Particular examples of alkylene chains represented by Alk1 and/or Alk2 when each is present in compounds of the invention include -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2-, -(CH2)2CH2-, -C(CH3)2-, -(CH2)3CH2-, -CH2CH(CH3)CH2-, -C(CH3)2CH2- or -CH(CH3)CH2CH2- chains.
Optionally substituted cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy1 in compounds of the invention include optionally substituted C3-10 cycloaliphatic groups. Particular examples include optionally substituted C3-ιo cycloalkyl, e.g. C3- cycloalkyl, or C3-ι0 cycloalkenyl, e.g. C3- cycloalkenyl, groups.
Particular examples of cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy1 include optionally substituted cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, 2-cyclobuten-1-yl, 2-cyclopenten-1 -yl and 3-cyclopenten-1 -yl groups, especially cyclopropyl.
The optional substituents which may be present on the cycloaliphatic groups represented by the group Cy1 include one, two, three or more substituents selected from halogen atoms, or C-ι-6 alkyl, e.g. methyl or ethyl, haloCι-6alkyl, e.g. halomethyl or haloethyl such as difluoromethyl or trifluoromethyl, optionally substituted by hydroxyl, e.g. -C(OH)(CF3)2, C-ι-6 alkoxy, e.g. methoxy or ethoxy, haloCi-βalkoxy, e.g. halomethoxy or haloethoxy such as difluoromethoxy or trifluoromethoxy, thiol, Cι-6 alkylthiol, e.g. methylthiol or ethylthiol, carbonyl (=0), thiocarbonyl (=S), imino (=NR4a) [where R4a is an -OH group or a C-ι-6 alkyl group], or -(Alk3)vR5 groups in which Alk3 is a straight or branched C1-3alkylene chain, v is zero or the integer 1 and R5 is a C3-8 cycloalkyl, -OH, -SH, -N(R6)(R7) [in which R6 and R7 is each independently selected from a hydrogen atom or an optionally substituted alkyl or C3-8 cycloalkyl group], -OR6, -SR6, -CN, -N02) -CO2R6, -SOR6, -SO2R6, -S03R6, -OC02R6, -C(O)R6, -OC(O)R6, -C(S)R6, -C(0)N(R6)(R7), -OC(O)N(R6)(R7), -N(R6)C(O)R7, -C(S)N(R6)(R7), -N(R6)C(S)R7,
-SO2N(R6)(R7), -N(R6)SO2R7, -N(R6)C(0)N(R7)(R8) [where R8 is as defined for R6], -N(R6)C(S)N(R7)(R8), -N(R6)S02N(R7)(R8) or an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group. Particular examples of Alk3 chains include -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2- chains.
When R5, R6, R7 and/or R8 is present as a C3-8 cycloalkyl group it may be for example a cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl group. Optional substituents which may be present on such groups include for example one, two or three substituents which may be the same or different selected from halogen atoms, for example fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms, or hydroxy or Cι_6 alkoxy, e.g. methoxy, ethoxy or isopropoxy, groups.
When the groups R6 and R7 or R7 and R8 are both alkyl groups these groups may be joined, together with the N atom to which they are attached, to form a heterocyclic ring. Such heterocyclic rings may be optionally interrupted by a further heteroatom or heteroatom-containing group selected from -0-, -S-, -N(R7)-, -C(O)- or -C(S)- groups. Particular examples of such heterocyclic rings include piperidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl and piperazinyl rings.
When R5 is an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group it may be any such group as described hereinafter in relation to Cy1.
In general, optionally substituted aromatic groups represented by the group Cy1 include for example monocyclic or bicyclic fused ring C6-ι2 aromatic groups, such as phenyl, 1- or 2-naphthyl, 1- or 2-tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl or indenyl groups, especially phenyl.
Heteroaromatic groups represented by the group Cy1 include for example
Ci-g heteroaromatic groups containing for example one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms. In general, the heteroaromatic groups may be for example monocyclic or bicyclic fused ring heteroaromatic groups. Monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include for example five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms. Bicyclic heteroaromatic groups include for example eight- to thirteen- membered fused ring heteroaromatic groups containing one, two or more heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms.
Particular examples of heteroaromatic groups of these types include pyrrolyl, furyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, Λ/-Cι-6alkylimidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, 1 ,2,3-triazolyl, 1 ,2,4-triazolyl, 1 ,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1 ,2,5- oxadiazolyl, 1 ,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 1 ,3,4-thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, 1 ,3,5-triazinyl, 1 ,2,4-triazinyl, 1 ,2,3-triazinyl, benzofuryl, [2,3-dihydro]benzofuryl, benzothienyl, [2,3-dihydro]benzothienyl, benzotriazolyl, indolyl, indolinyl, indazolinyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazo[1 ,2- a]pyridyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzopyranyl, [3,4- dihydro]benzopyranyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, imidazo[1 ,5- a]pyridinyl, imidazo[1 ,5-a]pyrazinyl, imidazo[1 ,5-c]pyrimidinyl, pyrido[3,4- ibjpyridyl, pyrido[3,2-j]pyridyl, pyrido[4,3-b]pyridyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, phthalazinyl, tetrazolyl, 5,6,7, 8-tetrahydroquinolinyl, 5,6,7,8- tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, imidyl, e.g. succinimidyl, phthalimidyl or naphthalimidyl such as 1 ,8-naphthalimidyl, pyrazolo[4,3- ]pyrimidinyl, furo[3,2-c/]pyrimidinyl, thieno[3,2-c pyrimidinyl, pyrrolo[3,2-c/]pyrimidinyl, pyrazolo[3,2-ib]pyridinyl, furo[3,2-fc]pyridinyl, thieno[3,2-b]pyridinyl, pyrrolo[3,2-j ]pyhdinyl, thiazolo[3,2-a]pyridinyl, pyrido[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl, tetrahydroimidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl and dihydroimidazo[1 ,2-a]pyrimidinyl groups.
Optional substituents which may be present on aromatic or heteroaromatic groups represented by the group Cy1 include one, two, three or more substituents, each selected from an atom or group R10 in which R10 is R10a or
-LδAlk5(R10a)r, where R10a is a halogen atom, or an amino (-NH2), substituted amino, nitro, cyano, hydroxyl (-OH), substituted hydroxyl, formyl, carboxyl (-CO2H), esterified carboxyl, thiol (-SH), substituted thiol, -COR11 [where R11 is an -L6Alk3(R10a)r, aryl or heteroaryl group], -CSR11, -S03H, -SOR11, -SO2R11, -SO3R11, -SO2NH2, -S02NHR11, -S02N(R11)2) -CONH2, -CSNH2, -CONHR11, -CSNHR11, -CON(R11)2, -CSN(R11)2) -N(R12)S02R11 [where R12 is a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched alkyl group], -N(S02R11)2, -N(R12)S02NH2, -N(R12)S02NHR11, -N(R12)S02N(R11)2, -N(R12)COR11, -N(R12)CONH2) -N(R12)CONHR11, -N(R12)CON(R11)2, -N(R12)CSNH2, -N(R12)CSNHR11, -N(R12)CSN(R11)2, -N(R12)CSR11, -N(R12)C(0)OR11, -C=NR12(NR12), -S02NHet1 [where -NHet is an optionally substituted C3.7 cyclicamino group optionally containing one or more other -O- or -S- atoms or -N(R12)-, -C(O)- or -C(S)- groups], -CONHet1, -CSNHet1, -N(R12)S02NHet1, -N(R12)CONHet1, -N(R12)CSNHet1, -S02N(R12)Het [where -Het is an optionally substituted monocyclic C3. carbocyclic group optionally containing one or more other -O- or -S- atoms or -N(R12)-, -C(O)-, -S(O)- or -S(0)2- groups], -Het, -CON(R12)Het, -CSN(R12)Het, -N(R12)CON(R12)Het, -N(R12)CSN(R12)Het, -N(R12)S02N(R12)Het, aryl or heteroaryl groups; L6 is a covalent bond or a linker atom or group; Alk5 is an optionally substituted straight or branched C1-6 alkylene, C2-6 alkenylene or C2.6 alkynylene chain, optionally interrupted by one, two or three -O- or -S- atoms or -S(0)k- [where k is an integer 1 or 2] or -N(R12)-, e.g. -N(CH3)-, groups; and r is zero or the integer 1 , 2, or 3. It will be appreciated that when two R11 or R12 groups are present in one of the above substituents the R11 and R12 groups may be the same or different.
When L6 in the group -L6Alk5(R10a)r is a linker atom or group it may be for example any divalent linking atom or group. Particular examples include -O- or -S- atoms or -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -C(S)-, -S(O)-, -S(0)2~, -N(R3)- [where R3 is a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched alkyl group], -N(R3)0-, -N(R3)N-, -CON(R3)-, -OC(0)N(R3)-, -CSN(R3)-, -N(R3)CO-, -N(R3)C(0)0-, -N(R3)CS-, -S(0)2N(R3)-, -N(R3)S(0)2-, -N(R3)CON(R3)-, -N(R3)CSN(R3)- or -N(R3)S02N(R3)- groups. Where L6 contains two R3 groups these may be the same or different.
When in the group -L6Alk5(R10a)r r is an integer 1 , 2 or 3, it is to be understood that the substituent or substituents R10a may be present on any suitable carbon atom in -Alk5. Where more than one R10a substituent is present these may be the same or different and may be present on the same or different atom in -Alk5. Clearly, when r is zero and no substituent R10a is present the alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene chain represented by Alk5 becomes an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group.
When R10a is a substituted amino group it may be for example a group -NHR11 [where R11 is as defined above] or a group -N(R11)2 wherein each R11 group is the same or different.
When R10a is a halogen atom it may be for example a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom.
When R10a is a substituted hydroxyl or substituted thiol group it may be for example a group -OR11 or -SR12 respectively.
Esterified carboxyl groups represented by the group R10a include groups of formula -C02Alk6 wherein Alk6 is a straight or branched, optionally substituted Cι-β alkyl group such as a methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl or tert-butyl group; a C6-i2arylCι-8alkyl group such as an optionally substituted benzyl, phenylethyl, phenylpropyl, 1-naphthylmethyl or 2- naphthylmethyl group; a G^aryl group such as an optionally substituted phenyl, 1-naphthyl or 2-naphthyl group; a
Figure imgf000015_0001
group such as an optionally substituted phenyloxymethyl, phenyloxyethyl, 1-naphthyloxymethyl, or 2-naphthyloxymethyl group; an optionally substituted Ci-salkanoyloxyCi-salkyl group, such as a pivaloyloxymethyl, propionyloxyethyl or propionyloxypropyl group; or a C6-ι2aroyloxyCι.8alkyl group such as an optionally substituted benzoyloxyethyl or benzoyloxypropyl group. Optional substituents present on the Alk6 group include R10a atoms and groups as described above.
When Alk5 is present in or as a substituent it may be for example a -CH2-, -CH(CH3)-, -C(CH3)2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2CH2-, -CH2CH(CH3)CH2-, -CH(CH3)CH2CH2-, -C(CH3)2CH2-, -CH=CH-, -CH=CHCH2-, -CH2CH=CH-, -CH=CHCH2CH2-, -CH2CH=CHCH2-, -CH2CH2CH=CH-, -C≡C-, -C≡CCH2-, -CH2C=C-, -C≡CCH2CH2-, -CH2C≡CCH2- or -CH2CH2C=C- chain, optionally interrupted by one, two, or three -O- or -S- atoms or -S(O)-, -S(0)2- or -N(R12)-, e.g. -N(CH3)-, groups. The aliphatic chains represented by Alk5 may be optionally substituted by one, two or three halogen atoms in addition to any R10a groups that may be present.
Aryl or heteroaryl groups represented by the groups R10a or R11 include mono- or bicyclic optionally substituted Cβ-12 aromatic or C1.9 heteroaromatic groups as described above for the group Cy1. The aromatic and heteroaromatic groups may be attached to the group Cy1 in compounds of formula (1) by any carbon atom or heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen atom, as appropriate.
It will be appreciated that when -NHet1 or -Het forms part of a substituent R10 the heteroatoms or heteroatom-containing groups that may be present within the ring -NHet1 or -Het take the place of carbon atoms within the parent carbocyclic ring.
Thus when -NHet1 or -Het forms part of a substituent R10 each may be for example an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperidinyl or thiazolidinyl group. Additionally Het may represent, for example, an optionally substituted cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl group. Optional substituents which may be present on -NHet1 include those substituents described above when Cy1 is a heterocycloaliphatic group.
Particularly useful atoms or groups represented by R10 include fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine atoms, or Cι-6 alkyl, e.g. methyl, ethyl, t?-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl or tert-butyl, optionally substituted phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, furyl, thiazolyl, or thienyl, C-ι-6 hydroxyalkyl, e.g. hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl, carboxyCι-6alkyl, e.g. carboxyethyl, C1-6 alkylthio, e.g. methylthio or ethylthio, carboxyCι-6alkylthio, e.g. carboxymethylthio, 2-carboxyethylthio or 3-carboxy- propylthio, Ci-β alkoxy, e.g. methoxy or ethoxy, hydroxyC1-6alkoxy, e.g. 2- hydroxyethoxy, optionally substituted phenoxy, pyridyloxy, thiazolyoxy, phenylthio or pyridylthio, C3-7 cycloalkyl, e.g. cyclobutyl or cyclopentyl, C5-7 cycloalkoxy, e.g. cyclopentyloxy, haloCι-6alkyl, e.g. trifluoromethyl, haloCι-6alkoxy, e.g. trifluoromethoxy, Ci-β alkylamino, e.g. methylamino or ethylamino, -CH(CH3)NH2 or -C(CH3)2NH2, haloC1-6alkylamino, e.g. fluoroCι-6alkylamino, -CH(CF3)NH2 or -C(CF3)2NH2, amino (-NH2), aminoCi-βalkyl, e.g. aminomethyl or aminoethyl, Cι-6dialkylamino, e.g. dimethylamino or diethylamino, Ci-ealkylaminoCi-βalkyl, e.g. ethylaminoethyl, Ci-βdialkylaminoCi-ealkyl, e.g. diethylaminoethyl, aminoCi-βalkoxy, e.g. aminoethoxy, C-i-ealkylaminoCi-ealkoxy, e.g. methylaminoethoxy, Ci-βdialkyl- aminoCι-6alkoxy, e.g. dimethylaminoethoxy, diethylaminoethoxy, diisopropylaminoethoxy or dimethylaminopropoxy, imido, such as phthalimido or naphthalimido, e.g. 1 ,8-naphthalimido, nitro, cyano, hydroxyl (-OH), formyl [HC(O)-], carboxyl (-C02H), -C02Alk6 [where Alk6 is as defined above], C1-6 alkanoyl, e.g. acetyl, optionally substituted benzoyl, thiol (-SH), thioCι-6alkyl, e.g thiomethyl or thioethyl, sulphonyl (-S03H), Cι-6alkylsulphonyl, e.g methylsulphonyl, aminosulphonyl (-S02NH2), Ci-βalkylaminosulphonyl, e.g methylaminosulphonyl or ethylaminosulphonyl, Ci-βdialkylaminosulphonyl, e.g dimethylaminosulphonyl or diethylaminosulphonyl, phenylaminosulphonyl carboxamido (-CONH2), Cι-6alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. methylaminocarbonyl or ethylaminocarbonyl, Ci-βdialkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. dimethylaminocarbonyl or diethylaminocarbonyl, aminoC1-6alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. aminoethylamino- carbonyl, C1.6dialkylaminoCι-6alkylaminocarbonyl, e.g. diethylaminoethyl- aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, Cι-6alkylaminocarbonylamino, e.g. methylaminocarbonylamino or ethylaminocarbonylamino, Cι-6dialkylamino- carbonylamino, e.g. dimethylaminocarbonylamino or diethylamino- carbonylamino, Cι-6alkylaminocabonylCι-6alkylamino, e.g. methylamino- carbonylmethylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, Ci-βalkylaminothiocarbonyl- amino, e.g. methylaminothiocarbonylamino or ethylaminothiocarbonylamino, Ci-edialkylaminothiocarbonylamino, e.g. dimethylaminothiocarbonylamino or diethylaminothiocarbonylamino, Ci-ealkylaminothiocarbonylCi-ealkylamino, e.g. ethylaminothiocarbonylmethylamino, -CONHC(=NH)NH2, Ci-βalkylsulphonyl- amino, e.g. methylsulphonylamino or ethylsulphonylamino, Ci-βdialkyl- sulphonylamino, e.g. dimethylsulphonylamino or diethylsulphonylamino, optionally substituted phenylsulphonylamino, aminosulphonylamino (-NHS02NH2), Ci-ealkylaminosulphonylamino, e.g. methylaminosulphonylamino or ethylaminosulphonylamino, Ci.6diaIkylaminosulphonylamino, e.g. dimethyl- aminosulphonylamino or diethylaminosulphonylamino, optionally substituted morpholinesulphonylamino or morpholinesulphonylCi-βalkylamino, optionally substituted phenylaminosulphonylamino, Cι-6alkanoylamino, e.g. acetylamino, aminoCi-βalkanoylamino, e.g. aminoacetylamino, Cι.6dialkylaminoCι_6alkanoyl- amino, e.g. dimethylaminoacetylamino, Cι-6alkanoylaminoCι-6alkyl, e.g. acetylaminomethyl, Ci-ealkanoylaminoCi-βalkylamino, e.g. acetamidoethyl- amino, Cι-6alkoxycarbonylamino, e.g. methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonyl- amino or tert-butoxycarbonylamino, or optionally substituted benzyloxy, pyridyl methoxy, thiazolylmethoxy, benzyloxycarbonylamino, benzyloxy- carbonylaminoCi-βalkyl, e.g. benzyloxycarbonylaminoethyl, benzothio, pyridyl- methylthio orthiazolylmethylthio groups.
A further particularly useful group of substituents represented by R10 when present on aromatic or heteroaromatic groups includes substituents of formula
-L6Alk5R10a where L6 is preferably a covalent bond or an -O- or -S- atom or -N(R3)-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -O-C(O)-, -N(R3)CO-, -CON(R3)- or -N(R3)S(0)2- group, Alk5 is an optionally substituted Chalky! group optionally interrupted by one or two -O- or -S- atoms or -N(R12)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -CON(R12)- or -N(R12)CO- groups, and R10a is an optionally substituted Het group as herein defined or an optionally substituted heteroaromatic group as hereinbefore described in relation to Cy1.
Where desired, two R10 substituents may be linked together to form a cyclic group such as a cyclic ether, e.g. a Cι-6 alkylenedioxy group such as methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy.
It will be appreciated that where two or more R10 substituents are present, these need not necessarily be the same atoms and/or groups. In general, the substituent(s) may be present at any available ring position on the aromatic or heteroaromatic group represented by the group Cy1.
The substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group represented by Ar in compounds of the invention may be any aromatic or heteroaromatic group as hereinbefore described for Cy1. Optional substituents which may be present include those R10 atoms and groups as generally or particularly described in relation to Cy1 aromatic and heteroaromatic groups.
The presence of certain substituents in the compounds of formula (1) may enable salts of the compounds to be formed. Suitable salts include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, for example acid addition salts derived from inorganic or organic acids, and salts derived from inorganic and organic bases.
Acid addition salts include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, hydroiodides, alkylsulfonates, e.g. methanesulfonates, ethanesulfonates, or isothionates, arylsulfonates, e.g. p-toluenesulfonates, besylates or napsylates, phosphates, sulphates, hydrogensulphates, acetates, trifluoroacetates, propionates, citrates, maleates, fumarates, malonates, succinates, lactates, oxalates, tartrates and benzoates.
Salts derived from inorganic or organic bases include alkali metal salts such as sodium or potassium salts, alkaline earth metal salts such as magnesium or calcium salts, and organic amine salts such as morpholine, piperidine, dimethylamine or diethylamine salts.
Particularly useful salts of compounds according to the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, especially acid addition pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
In one embodiment, Y is -C(O)-. In another embodiment, Y is -S(0)2-.
In one class of compounds of formula (1 ) n is the integer 1. When in compounds of formula (1 ) n is the integer 1 , Alk1 is preferably a -CH2CH2- chain or more especially is -CH2-.
In one class of compounds of formula (1 ) n is zero.
Particularly preferred Cy1 optionally substituted cycloaliphatic groups include optionally substituted C3-7 cycloalkyl groups, especially cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl groups. Cy1 is in particular a cyclopropyl group.
Each of these preferred Cy1 cycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted. When substituents are present these may in particular include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or C-i-e alkyl groups, especially Ci-3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi-ealkyl groups, especially fluoroCi-βalkyl groups, most especially a -CF3 group, or C1-6 alkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloCi-βalkoxy groups, especially fluoroCι-6alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF3 group, or a cyano (-CN), esterified carboxyl, especially -C02CH3 or -C02C(CH3)3, nitro (-N02), amino (-NH2), substituted amino, especially -NHCH3 or -N(CH3)2, -C(0)R6, especially -C(0)CH3, or -N(R6)C(0)R7, especially -NHCOCH3, group.
Particularly preferred Cy1 aromatic groups include optionally substituted phenyl groups. Particularly preferred heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups, especially optionally substituted five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms. Particularly preferred optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl and triazinyl groups. In a further preference, the heteroaromatic group may be an eight- to thirteen-membered bicyclic fused ring containing one or two oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms. Particularly useful groups of this type include optionally substituted indolyl groups.
Particularly preferred optional substituents which may be present on Cy1 aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include one, two or three atoms or groups -R10a or -L6Alk5(R10a)r as hereinbefore defined. Particularly useful optional substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or Cι_6 alkyl groups, especially C-i-3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi-βalkyl groups, especially fluoroCi-βalkyl groups, most especially a -CF3 group, or C-i-βalkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloC-i-βalkoxy groups, especially fluoroCι-6alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF3 group, or a cyano (-CN), carboxyl (-C02H), esterified carboxyl (-C02Alk6), especially -C02CH3, -C02CH2CH3, or -C02C(CH3)3, nitro (-N02), amino (-NH2), substituted amino, especially -NHCH3 or -N(CH3)2, -COR11, especially -COCH3, or -N(R12)COR11, especially -NHCOCHs, group.
Further preferred optional substituents which may be present on Cy1 aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include groups of formula -L6Alk5(R10a)r in which r is the integer 1 or 2, L6 is a covalent bond or an -O- or -S- atom or a -N(R3)-, especially -NH- or -N(CH3)-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, -C(0)0-, -OC(O)-, -N(R3)CO-, especially -NHCO-, or -CON(R3)-, especially -CONH-, group, Alk5 is a Ci-6 alkylene chain, especially a -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2- or -CH2CH2CH2CH2- chain, and R10a is a hydroxyl or substituted hydroxyl group, especially a -OCH3, -OCH2CH3 or -OCH(CH3)2 group, or a -NH2 or substituted amino group, especially a -N(CH3)2 or -N(CH2CH3)2 group, or a -Het group, especially an optionally substituted monocyclic Cs-7 carbocyclic group containing one, two or three -0-, -S-, -N(R12)-, especially -NH- or -N(CH3)-, or -C(O)- groups within the ring structure as previously described, most especially an optionally substituted pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, e.g. Λ/-methylpiperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl or piperazinyl group, or R10a is an optionally substituted heteroaromatic group, especially a five- or six-membered monocyclic heteroaromatic group containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms, such as optionally substituted pyrrolyl, furyl, thienyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, triazinyl, pyridazinyl, or pyrazinyl group. Particularly preferred optional substituents on the -Het groups just described include hydroxyl (-OH) and carboxyl (-C02H) groups or those preferred optional substituents just described in relation to the group Cy1, especially when Cy1 is a cycloalkyl group.
In one particularly preferred group of compounds of formula (1) Cy1 is an optionally substituted phenyl group, especially a phenyl group optionally substituted by one, two or three substituents where at least one, and preferably two, substituents are located ort/io to the bond joining Cy1 to the remainder of the compound of formula (1). Particularly preferred ortho substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine or chlorine atoms, or C1-3 alkyl groups, especially methyl, C1-3 alkoxy groups, especially methoxy, haloC1-3alkyl groups, especially -CF3, haloCι-3alkoxy groups, especially -OCF3, or cyano (-CN), groups. In this class of compounds a second or third optional substituent when present in a position other than the ortho positions of the ring Cy1 may be preferably an atom or group -R10a or -L6Alk5(R10a)r as herein generally and particularly described. In another preference, the Cy1 phenyl group may have a substituent para to the bond joining Cy1 to the remainder of the compound of formula (1). Particular para substituents include those particularly preferred ortho substituents just described. Where desired, the para substituent may be present with other ortho or meta substituents as just mentioned.
Examples of specific substituents on Cy1 include halogen (especially fluoro or chloro) and C-|.4 alkyl (especially methyl).
Specific Cy1 groups include phenyl, fluorophenyl, chlorophenyl, methylphenyl and cyclopropyl.
Particularly preferred Ar aromatic groups in compounds of formula (1 ) include optionally substituted phenyl groups. Particularly preferred heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups, especially optionally substituted five- or six-membered heteroaromatic groups containing one, two, three or four heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms. Particularly preferred optionally substituted monocyclic heteroaromatic groups include optionally substituted furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl and triazinyl groups.
Particularly preferred optional substituents which may be present on Ar aromatic or heteroaromatic groups include atoms or groups -R10a or -L6Alk5(R10a)r as hereinbefore defined. Particularly useful optional substituents include halogen atoms, especially fluorine, chlorine or bromine atoms, or C1-6 alkyl groups, especially Cι-3 alkyl groups, most especially a methyl group, or haloCi-βalkyl groups, especially fluoroCι-6alkyl groups, most especially a -CF3 group, or C-i-β alkoxy groups, especially a methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy or isopropoxy group, or haloCι_6alkoxy groups, especially fluoroCι-6alkoxy groups, most especially a -OCF3 group, or a cyano (-CN), esterified carboxyl, especially -C02CH3 or -C02C(CH3)3, nitro (-N02), amino (-NH2), substituted amino, especially -NHCH3 or -N(CH3)2, -COR11, especially -COCH3, or -N(R12)COR11, especially -NHCOCH3> group.
Particularly useful Ar groups in compounds of formula (1 ) include phenyl and mono- or disubstituted phenyl groups in which each substituent is in particular a -R10a or -L6Alk5(R10a)r atom or group as just defined and is especially a halogen atom or a Cι_3 alkyl, Cι-3 alkoxy or -CN group.
Examples of specific substituents on Ar include halogen (especially fluoro or chloro), cyano and C-i-4 alkyl (especially methyl).
Specific Ar groups include phenyl, difluorophenyl, (chloro)(fluoro)phenyl, (fluoro)(methyl)phenyl, chlorophenyl, cyanophenyl and methylphenyl.
Particular examples of Alk2 when present in compounds of the invention include -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, -C(CH3)2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-. In one embodiment, Alk2 is -CH2-. In another embodiment, Alk2 is -C(CH3)2-.
Suitably, R1 is methyl.
Suitably, R2 is hydrogen or methyl. Suitably, R3 is hydrogen or methyl. In one embodiment, R2 and R3 are both hydrogen. In another embodiment, R2 and R3 are both methyl. In compounds of the invention, m may be selected to vary the ring size from a ring having, in addition to the nitrogen atom, a minimum of 3 carbon atoms up to 6 carbon atoms. Particularly advantageous rings are those wherein m is the integer 1 or 2.
In a preferred embodiment, m is the integer 2. In another embodiment, m is the integer 1. In a further embodiment, m is the integer 3.
In a particular embodiment, p is the integer 1. In another embodiment, p is the integer 2.
Each substituent Rd may be present on any ring carbon atom. In one particular class of compounds of the invention one or two Rd substituents are present.
Suitable values of Rd include -OH, -(Alk2)OH, -(Alk2)OR1, -NR2R3 and -(Alk2)NR2R3.
Detailed values of Rd include -OH, -CH2OH, -C(CH3)2OH, -CH2OCH3, -NH2, -N(CH3)2 and -CH2NH2.
Representative values of Rd include -OH, -(Alk2)OH and -(Alk2)OR1.
Illustrative values of Rd include -OH, -CH2OH, -C(CH3)2OH and -CH2OCH3.
Particular Rd substituents include -OH, -CH2OH, -CH(CH3)OH and -C(CH3)2OH groups. Particularly useful compounds of the invention include each of the compounds described in the Examples hereinafter, and the salts, solvates, hydrates and /V-oxides thereof.
Compounds according to the invention are potent and selective inhibitors of p38 kinases, including all isoforms and splice variants thereof. More specifically the compounds of the invention are inhibitors of p38α, p38β and p38β2. The ability of the compounds to act in this way may be simply determined by employing tests such as those described in the Examples hereinafter.
The compounds of formula (1) are of use in modulating the activity of p38 kinases and in particular are of use in the prophylaxis and treatment of any p38 kinase mediated diseases or disorders in a human, or other mammal. The invention extends to such a use and to the use of the compounds for the manufacture of a medicament for treating such diseases or disorders. Further the invention extends to the administration to a human of an effective amount of a p38 inhibitor for treating any such disease or disorder.
The invention also extends to the prophylaxis or treatment of any disease or disorder in which p38 kinase plays a role including conditions caused by excessive or unregulated pro-inflammatory cytokine production including for example excessive or unregulated TNF, IL-1 , IL-6 and IL-8 production in a human, or other mammal. The invention extends to such a use and to the use of the compounds for the manufacture of a medicament for treating such cytokine-mediated diseases or disorders. Further the invention extends to the administration to a human of an effective amount of a p38 inhibitor for treating any such disease or disorder.
Diseases or disorders in which p38 kinase plays a role either directly or via pro-inflammatory cytokines including the cytokines TNF, IL-1 , IL-6 and IL-8 include without limitation autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, neurodegenerative disorders, viral diseases, allergies, infectious diseases, heart attacks, angiogenic disorders, reperfusion/ischemia in stroke, vascular hyperplasia, organ hypoxia, cardiac hypertrophy, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation and conditions associated with prostaglandin endoperoxidase synthetase-2 (COX-2).
Autoimmune diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ulcerative colitis, Crohn's disease, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, glomerulonephritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, chronic thyroiditis, Grave's disease, hemolytic anemia, autoimmune gastritis, autoimmune neutropenia, thrombocytopenia, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, atopic dermatitis, graft vs host disease and psoriasis.
The invention further extends to the particular autoimmune disease rheumatoid arthritis.
Inflammatory diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to asthma, allergies, respiratory distress syndrome and acute or chronic pancreatitis.
Destructive bone disorders which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to osteoporosis, osteoarthritis and multiple myeloma-related bone disorder.
Proliferative diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to acute or chronic myelogenous leukemia, Kaposi's sarcoma, metastatic melanoma and multiple myeloma. Neurodegenerative diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, cerebral ischemias and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury.
Viral diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to acute hepatitis infection (including hepatitis A, hepatitis B and hepatitis C), HIV infection and CMV retinitis.
Infectious diseases which may be prevented or treated include but are not limited to septic shock, sepsis and Shigellosis.
In addition, p38 inhibitors of this invention also exhibit inhibition of expression of inducible pro-inflammatory proteins such as prostaglandin endoperoxidase synthetase-2, otherwise known as cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2), and are therefore of use in therapy. Pro-inflammatory mediators of the cyclooxygenase pathway derived from arachidonic acid are produced by inducible COX-2 enzyme. Regulation of COX-2 would regulate these pro- inflammatory mediators such as prostaglandins, which affect a wide variety of cells and are important and critical inflammatory mediators of a wide variety of disease states and conditions. In particular these inflammatory mediators have been implicated in pain, such as in the sensitization of pain receptors, or edema. Accordingly additional p38 mediated conditions which may be prevented or treated include edema, analgesia, fever and pain such as neuromuscular pain, headache, dental pain, arthritis pain and pain caused by cancer.
As a result of their p38 inhibitory activity, compounds of the invention have utility in the prevention and treatment of diseases associated with cytokine production including but not limited to those diseases associated with TNF, IL-1 , IL-6 and IL-8 production. Thus, TNF mediated diseases or conditions include for example rheumatoid arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, osteoarthritis, gouty arthritis and other arthritic conditions, sepsis, septic shock syndrome, adult respiratory distress syndrome, cerebral malaria, chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, silicosis, pulmonary sarcoidosis, bone resorption disease, reperfusion injury, graft vs. host reaction, allograft rejections, fever and myalgias due to infection, cachexia secondary to infection, AIDS, ARC or malignancy, keloid formation, scar tissue formation, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, pyresis, viral infections such as HIV, CMV, influenza and herpes; and veterinary viral infections, such as lentivirus infections, including but not limited to equine infectious anemia virus, caprine arthritis virus, visna virus or maedi virus; or retrovirus infections, including feline immunodeficiency virus, bovine immunodeficiency virus and canine immunodeficiency virus.
Compounds of the invention may also be used in the treatment of viral infections, where such viruses elicit TNF production in vivo or are sensitive to upregulation by TNF. Such viruses include those that produce TNF as a result of infection and those that are sensitive to inhibition, for instance as a result of decreased replication, directly or indirectly by the TNF inhibiting compounds of the invention. Such viruses include, but are not limited to, HIV-1 , HIV-2 and HIV-3, Cytomegalovirus (CMV), Influenza, adenovirus and the Herpes group of viruses such as Herpes Zoster and Herpes Simplex.
IL-1 mediated diseases or conditions include for example rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, stroke, endotoxemia and/or toxic shock syndrome, inflammatory reaction induced by endotoxin, diabetes, pancreatic β-cell disease, Alzheimer's disease, tuberculosis, atherosclerosis, muscle degeneration and cachexia. IL-8 mediated diseases and conditions include for example those characterized by massive neutrophil infiltration such as psoriasis, inflammatory bowel disease, asthma, cardiac, brain and renal reperfusion injury, adult respiratory distress syndrome, thrombosis and glomerulonephritis. The increased IL-8 production associated with each of these diseases is responsible for the chemotaxis of neutrophils into inflammatory sites. This is due to the unique property of IL-8 (in comparison to TNF, IL-1 and IL-6) of promoting neutrophil chemotaxis and activation. Therefore, inhibition of IL-8 production would lead to a direct reduction in neutrophil infiltration.
It is also known that both IL-6 and IL-8 are produced during rhinovirus (HRV) infections and contribute to the pathogenesis of the common cold and exacerbation of asthma associated with HRV infection [Turner et al., Clin. Infec. Dis., 1997, 26, 840; Grunberg et al., Am. J. Crit. Care Med., 1997, 155, 1362; Zhu et al., J. Clin. Invest, 1996, 97, 421]. It has also been demonstrated in vitro that infection of pulmonary epithelial cells (which represent the primary site of infection by HRV) with HRV results in production of IL-6 and IL-8 [Sabauste et al., J. Clin. Invest, 1995, 96, 549]. Therefore, p38 inhibitors of the invention may be used for the treatment or prophylaxis of the common cold or respiratory viral infection caused by human rhinovirus infection (HRV), other enteroviruses, coronavirus, influenza virus, parainfluenza virus, respiratory syncytial virus or adenovirus infection.
For the prophylaxis or treatment of a p38 or pro-inflammatory cytokine mediated disease the compounds according to the invention may be administered to a human or mammal as pharmaceutical compositions, and according to a further aspect of the invention we provide a pharmaceutical composition which comprises a compound of formula (1 ) together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients or diluents. Pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may take a form suitable for oral, buccal, parenteral, nasal, topical, ophthalmic or rectal administration, or a form suitable for administration by inhalation or insufflation.
For oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets, lozenges or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g. pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g. lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogenphosphate); lubricants (e.g. magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g. potato starch or sodium glycollate); or wetting agents (e.g. sodium lauryl sulphate). The tablets may be coated by methods well known in the art. Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents, emulsifying agents, non-aqueous vehicles and preservatives. The preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavouring, colouring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
For buccal administration the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
The compounds of formula (1 ) may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g. by bolus injection or infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g. in glass ampoules or multi-dose containers, e.g. glass vials. The compositions for injection may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilising, preserving and/or dispersing agents. Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g. sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
In addition to the formulations described above, the compounds of formula (1 ) may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long-acting formulations may be administered by implantation or by intramuscular injection.
For nasal administration or administration by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation for pressurised packs or a nebuliser, with the use of suitable propellant, e.g. dichlorodifluoromethane, trichloro- fluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas or mixture of gases.
The compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active ingredient. The pack or dispensing device may be accompanied by instructions for administration.
For topical administration the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated in a suitable ointment containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Particular carriers include, for example, mineral oil, liquid petroleum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, emulsifying wax and water. Alternatively the compounds for use according to the present invention may be formulated in a suitable lotion containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Particular carriers include, for example, mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol and water.
For ophthalmic administration the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated as microionized suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, either with or without a preservative such as a bactericidal or fungicidal agent, for example phenylmercuric nitrate, benzylalkonium chloride or chlorhexidine acetate. Alternatively for ophthalmic administration compounds may be formulated in an ointment such as petrolatum.
For rectal administration the compounds for use according to the present invention may be conveniently formulated as suppositories. These can be prepared by mixing the active component with a suitable non-irritating excipient which is solid at room temperature but liquid at rectal temperature and so will melt in the rectum to release the active component. Such materials include for example cocoa butter, beeswax and polyethylene glycols.
The quantity of a compound of the invention required for the prophylaxis or treatment of a particular condition will vary depending on the compound chosen, and the condition of the patient to be treated. In general, however, daily dosages may range from around 100 ng/kg to 100 mg/kg, e.g. around 0.01 mg/kg to 40 mg/kg body weight, for oral or buccal administration, from around 10 ng/kg to 50 mg/kg body weight for parenteral administration, and around 0.05 mg to around 1000 mg, e.g. around 0.5 mg to around 1000 mg, for nasal administration or administration by inhalation or insufflation. The compounds of the invention may be prepared by a number of processes as generally described below and more specifically in the Examples hereinafter. In the following process description, the symbols Ar, Cy1 , Alk1, n, Rd, p, m and Y when used in the formulae depicted are to be understood to represent those groups described above in relation to formula (1 ) unless otherwise indicated. In the reactions described below, it may be necessary to protect reactive functional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, thio or carboxy groups, where these are desired in the final product, to avoid their unwanted participation in the reactions. Conventional protecting groups may be used in accordance with standard practice [see, for example, Greene, T. W. in "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley and Sons, 1999]. In some instances, deprotection may be the final step in the synthesis of a compound of formula (1 ) and the processes according to the invention described hereinafter are to be understood to extend to such removal of protecting groups.
Thus, according to a further aspect of the invention a compound of formula (1) in which Y is a -C(O)- group may be prepared from a carboxylic acid of formula (2) or ester of formula (5) according to amide bond forming reactions well known to those skilled in the art. Such reactions are set forth in references such as March's Advanced Organic Chemistry (John Wiley and Sons 1992), Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1992) and Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-8, 1984, and volumes 1-11 , 1994 (Pergamon). Examples of such methods that may be employed to give compounds of formula (1a) are set out, but not limited to the reactions, in Scheme 1 and Scheme 2 below. Scheme 1
Figure imgf000035_0001
(2) (4) (1a)
Thus, amides of formula (1a) may be formed by reaction of a carboxylate salt of formula (2) [where M+ is metal counterion such as a sodium or lithium ion or is alternatively an ammonium or trialkylammonium counterion] with an amine of formula (3) in the presence of a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, e.g. 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) or Λ/,Λ/'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, optionally in the presence of a base such as an amine, e.g. triethylamine or /V-methylmorpholine. These reactions may be performed in a solvent such as an amide solvent, e.g. Λ/,Λ/-dimethyl- formamide (DMF), or an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, or a halogenated solvent such as dichloromethane, at around ambient temperature to 60°C. In another procedure a pentafluorophenyl ester of formula (4) may be prepared by reaction of a carboxylic acid of formula (2) with pentafluorophenol in the presence of a coupling reagent such as 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide in a solvent such as an amide solvent, e.g. DMF, at around ambient temperature. Amides of formula (1a) can then be prepared by reaction of the pentafluorophenyl ester with amines of formula (3) in an organic solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at around ambient temperature, optionally in the presence of a tertiary amine base such as triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine. The intermediate acids of formula (2) may be prepared by hydrolysis of esters of formula (5) using a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. sodium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide, in water and a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran or an alcohol such as ethanol at a temperature from around ambient to reflux.
Amides of formula (1 a) can also be prepared directly from esters of formula (5) by heating with an amine of formula (3) up to the reflux temperature of the amine optionally in the presence of a solvent such as 2-ethoxyethanol either at atmospheric pressure or under pressure in a sealed tube (Scheme 2).
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000036_0001
(5) (1a)
The intermediate esters of formula (5) may be prepared by the methods set out in Scheme 3 below. In the Scheme the preparation of an ethyl ester is specifically shown, but it will be appreciated that other esters may be obtained by simply varying the ester starting material and if appropriate any reaction conditions.
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000037_0001
Figure imgf000037_0002
Thus, in Scheme 3 a compound of formula (5a) or (5b) may be prepared by reaction of a compound of formula (6) or (7) with an amine ArNH2 in the presence of a palladium catalyst. The reaction may be conveniently carried out in a solvent such as toluene at an elevated temperature, e.g. the reflux temperature, using a catalyst such as tris(dibenzylideneacetone)- dipalladium(O), a phosphine ligand such as 2,2'-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1'- binaphthyl, and a base such as caesium carbonate. Where desired, alternative reaction conditions may be used, for example as described in the literature [Luker et al., Tetrahedron Lett, 2001 , 41 , 7731 ; Buchwald, S.L., J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65, 1144; Hartwig, J.F., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 1998, 37, 2046].
Intermediates of formula (7) may be prepared by reaction of a compound of formula (8) with an alkylating agent of formula Cy1(Alk1)nZ, where Z is a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. a chlorine, bromine or iodine atom, or a sulphonyloxy group such as an alkylsulphonyloxy, e.g. trifluoromethylsulphonyloxy, or arylsulphonyloxy, e.g. phenylsulphonyloxy, group.
The reaction may be performed in the presence of a solvent, for example a substituted amide such as Λ/,Λ/-dimethylformamide, optionally in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as sodium hydride, or an organic base such as an organic amine, e.g. a cyclic amine such as 1 ,5- diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, or a resin-bound organic amine such as resin- bound 2-tert-butylimino-2-diethylamino-1 ,3-dimethylperhydro-1 ,3,2-diaza- phosphorine (PS-BEMP), at an elevated temperature, for example 80 to 100°C.
Intermediates of formula (6) may be prepared by the reaction of a compound of formula (8) with a boronic acid of formula Cy1B(OH)2 in which Cy1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group. The reaction may be performed in an organic solvent, for example a halogenated hydrocarbon such as dichloromethane or dichloroethane, in the presence of a copper reagent, for example a copper(l) salt such as Cul, or for example a copper(ll) reagent such as copper(ll) acetate, optionally in the presence of an oxidant, for example 2,2,6,6- tetramethylpiperidine-1 -oxide or pyridine-/V-oxide, optionally in the presence of a base, for example an organic amine such as an alkylamine, e.g. triethylamine, or an aromatic amine, e.g. pyridine, at a temperature from around ambient to the reflux temperature [see for example Chan, D.T. et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 1998, 2933; Lam, P.Y.S. et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 2001 , 3415].
Intermediates of formula (6) where Cy1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group may also be prepared by nucleophilic aromatic substitution of a suitably activated aryl or heteroaryl halide with a compound of formula (8). The reaction may be performed in a dialkylamide solvent such as DMF in the presence of a base such as a metal hydride, e.g. sodium hydride, at a temperature from around ambient to 100°C. Suitably activated aryl or heteroaryl halides are those with an electron-withdrawing substituent such as a nitro, cyano or ester group, e.g. a chloro- or fluoro-nitrobenzene or 2-chloro-5-nitropyridine. Alternatively a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl halide can be activated to nucleophilic substitution by Λ/-oxidation, e.g. 2-chloropyridine Λ/-oxide.
It will be appreciated that if desired the reactions just described may be carried out in the reverse order so that the amination using ArNH2 is performed first with the intermediate of formula (8) followed by alkylation/arylation to yield the compound of formula (5). It may be necessary to protect the nitrogen function of compounds of formula (8) during the course of these reactions. Such protection may be achieved by O- alkylation with an alkyl halide, e.g. cyclopropylmethyl bromide, or an arylalkyl bromide, e.g. benzyl bromide, as shown in Scheme 4.
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000040_0001
Where G = Aryl or alkyl group deprotection
Alkylation/ arylation
Figure imgf000040_0002
Figure imgf000040_0003
The O-alkylation reaction may be performed in an organic solvent such as DMF in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as Cs2C03 or an organic base such as an amine, e.g. a cyclic amine such as 1 ,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene, at an elevated temperature, e.g. 80 to 100°C, to give a compound of formula (13). Reaction of the protected compound (13) with ArNH2 under palladium catalysis can then be performed as previously described to give a compound of formula (14). Deprotection can then be achieved by treating a solution of this compound in an alcohol, e.g. MeOH, with a mineral acid such as concentrated HCl at an elevated temperature, e.g. the reflux temperature, to give a compound of formula (15). Alternatively when benzyl protection is employed then this group may be removed reductively by treating a solution of compound (14) in an organic solvent such as EtOH using a palladium or platinum catalyst, e.g. palladium on carbon or Pt02, under an elevated pressure of hydrogen at a temperature from around ambient to 60°C. Compounds of formula (15) can then undergo alkylation/arylation reactions as previously described to give compounds of formula (5).
Intermediate pyridinones of formula (8) may be prepared from pyridine N- oxides of formula (9) by sequential reaction with an anhydride, for example acetic anhydride, at an elevated temperature, for example the reflux temperature, followed by reaction with an inorganic base, for example a carbonate such as aqueous potassium carbonate, in a solvent such as an ether, for example a cyclic ether, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, at around ambient temperature. Alternatively the reaction may be performed using trifluoroacetic anhydride in Λ/,Λ/-dimethylformamide from 0°C to ambient temperature conditions [see for example Konno et al., Heterocycles, 1986, 24, 2169].
Pyridine /V-oxides of formula (9) may be formed by oxidation of pyridines of formula (10) using an oxidising agent such as hydrogen peroxide in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid, at an elevated temperature, for example around 70°C to 80°C, or alternatively by reaction with a peracid such as peracetic acid or m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, or an alcohol, e.g. tert- butanol, at a temperature from the ambient temperature to the reflux temperature.
Intermediate pyridines of formula (10) in Scheme 3 may be obtained by standard methods such as for example by the Sandmeyer reaction. Thus, for example, a bromide of formula (10) may be prepared by treatment of an aryl amine of formula (11) with an alkyl nitrite, for example tert-butyl nitrite, and a copper salt, for example copper(ll) bromide, in the presence of a solvent, for example a nitrile such as acetonitrile, at a temperature from about 0° to around 65°C.
Amines of formula (11) may be formed from 2-halopyridine-3-carbonitriles of formula (12) by reaction with a reagent such as ethyl 2-mercaptoacetate. The reaction may be performed in the presence of a solvent such as a substituted amide, for example V,Λ/-dimethylformamide, or an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol such as ethanol, in the presence of a base, for example an inorganic base such as sodium carbonate or a hydride, e.g. sodium hydride, or an organic base such as 1 ,5- diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene or a trialkylamine such as triethylamine, at a temperature between about 0°C and 100°C. The carbonitrile starting materials are readily available or may be obtained from known compounds using standard procedures.
In another process intermediate esters of formula (5a) may be prepared by the reactions set out in Scheme 5. In the Scheme below R20 represents an ester or nitrile and LG represents a leaving group such as a halogen atom, e.g. chlorine or bromine, or a sulfonyloxy group such as an alkylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy, or an arylsulfonyloxy group, e.g. p- toluenesulfonyloxy.
Scheme 5
ll)Br2
Figure imgf000042_0001
Thus, in step (A) of the reaction scheme a compound of formula (17) or (18), where Rx is an optionally substituted alkyl group, e.g. methyl, and W is a hydrogen atom, metal ion or amine salt, may be reacted with a thioamide of formula (19). The reaction may be performed in the presence of a base. Appropriate bases may include, but are not limited to, lithium bases such as tj-butyl- or tert-butyllithium or lithium diisopropylamide (LDA), silazanes, e.g. lithium hexamethyldisilazane (LiHMDS) or sodium hexamethyldisilazane (NaHMDS), carbonates, e.g. potassium carbonate, alkoxides, e.g. sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide or potassium tert-butoxide, hydroxides, e.g. NaOH, hydrides, e.g. sodium hydride, and organic amines, e.g. triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine or a cyclic amine such as /V-methylmorpholine or pyridine. The reaction may be performed in an organic solvent such as an amide, e.g. a substituted amide such as Λ/,V-dimethylformamide, an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, an alcohol, e.g. methanol, ethanol or propanol, or acetonitrile, at a temperature from ambient to the reflux temperature. In one particular aspect of the process the reaction is achieved using an alkoxide base, especially sodium ethoxide or sodium methoxide, in an alcoholic solvent, especially ethanol, at reflux temperature.
Intermediates of formula (17), where not commercially available, may be prepared using standard methodology (see, for example, Mir Hedayatullah, J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1981 , 18, 339). Similarly, intermediates of formula (18), where not commercially available, may be prepared using standard methodology. For example, they may be prepared in situ by reaction of an acetate, e.g. ethyl acetate, with a base such as sodium methoxide followed by addition of a formate, e.g. methyl formate.
In a similar manner, intermediates of formula (19), if not commercially available, may be prepared using methods known to those skilled in the art (see, for example, Adhikari et al., Aust J. Chem., 1999, 52, 63-67). For example, an isothiocyanate of formula Cy1NCS may be reacted with acetonitrile in the presence of a base, e.g. NaHMDS, in a suitable solvent, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, optionally at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C. According to the nature of the group Cy1, the intermediate of formula (19) may be prepared in situ, for example using the methods as described herein, followed by subsequent addition of a compound of formula (17) or (18).
During the course of this process an intermediate of formula (20) may be formed. If desired the intermediate may be isolated at the end of step (A) and subsequently reacted with intermediate (21 ) to form the desired amine (22). In some instances, however, it may advantageous not to isolate the intermediate of formula (20) and reaction (B) may be carried out directly with the reaction mixture of step (A).
If a different solvent is used during the second stage of the process, it may be necessary to evaporate the solvent, in vacuo, from the first stage of the process before proceeding with the second stage. Once evaporated, the crude solids from step (A) may be used in the next stage or they may be purified, for example by crystallisation, to yield an isolated intermediate, such as a compound of formula (20).
During step (B) of the process an intermediate of formula (21 ) may then be added to the reaction mixture or to the crude solids or purified product from step (A) in a suitable solvent. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, amides, e.g. a substituted amide such as A/,A/-dimethylformamide, alcohols, e.g. ethanol, methanol or isopropyl alcohol, ethers, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, and acetonitrile. The reaction may be performed at a temperature from ambient up to the reflux temperature.
During the course of step (B) an intermediate of formula (24):
Figure imgf000044_0001
may be observed or even isolated, depending upon the nature of the group R20. The intermediate of formula (24) may be converted to a compound of formula (22) using the methods described above. In this situation it may be necessary to add a base, in order for the reaction to proceed to completion. Appropriate bases include carbonates, e.g. caesium or potassium carbonate, alkoxides, e.g. potassium tert-butoxide, hydrides, e.g. sodium hydride, or organic amines, e.g. triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine or cyclic amines such as /V-methylmorpholine or pyridine.
Amines of formula (22) can be converted to bromides of formula (23) by standard methods such as for example by the Sandmeyer reaction as previously described for compounds of formula (11 ). Compounds of formula (5a) can then be prepared from these bromides by the palladium-catalysed amination reactions already described.
It will be appreciated that intermediates of formula (21), where not commercially available, may be prepared using standard methods known to those skilled in the art. For example, alcohol groups may be converted into leaving groups, such as halogen atoms or sulfonyloxy groups, using conditions known to the skilled artisan. For example, an alcohol may be reacted with thionyl chloride in a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g., dichloromethane, to yield the corresponding chloride. A base, e.g. triethylamine, may also be used in the reaction.
The nitriles of formula (23a), which may be prepared from the reaction scheme depicted in Scheme 5 by providing that R20 is -CN, are useful intermediates in the synthesis of intermediate carboxylic acids of formula (25a). This reaction may be performed by hydrolysis of the nitrile (23a) with a base such as an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. a 2M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide in an alcoholic solvent such as methanol or ethanol at reflux.
Figure imgf000045_0001
It will be appreciated that intermediates, such as intermediates (17), (18), (19) or (21 ), if not available commercially, may also be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, volumes 1-15 and Supplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989), Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, volumes 1-19 (John Wiley and Sons, 1999), Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-8, 1984, and volumes 1-11 , 1994 (Pergamon), Comprehensive Organic Functional Group Transformations, ed. Katritzky et al., volumes 1-7, 1995 (Pergamon), Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. Trost and Fleming, volumes 1-9 (Pergamon, 1991 ), Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, ed. Paquette, volumes 1-8 (John Wiley and Sons, 1995), Larock's Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989) and March's Advanced Organic Chemistry (John Wiley and Sons, 1992).
In another process amides of formula (1a) may be prepared by the reactions detailed in Scheme 6 below.
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000046_0001
Thus, acids of formula (25) or (25a) may be converted to amides of formula (27) by reaction with amines of formula (3) in the presence of coupling reagents in the same way as previously described for the conversion of compounds (2) to amides of formula (1a). Alternatively, the carboxylic acids may be converted to acid chlorides of formula (26) by reaction with a chlorinating agent such as oxalyl chloride optionally in the presence of a catalytic amount of DMF in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, or an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at around ambient temperature; or with a chlorinating agent such as thionyl chloride, typically in a solvent such as toluene, at the reflux temperature. The resultant acid chlorides may then be reacted with amines of formula (3) in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, in the presence of an amine base such as triethylamine at around ambient temperature to give amides of formula (27). Amides of formula (1a) may then be prepared from amides of formula (27) using a palladium-catalysed arylation procedure previously described in Scheme 1. During the course of the reactions described above it may be advantageous or necessary to protect the Rd substituents that may be present. Conventional protecting groups may be used in accordance with standard practice [see, for example, Greene, T. W. in "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", John Wiley and Sons, 1999]. In some instances, deprotection may be the final step in the synthesis of a compound of formula (1a) and the processes according to the invention described hereinafter are to be understood to extend to such removal of protecting groups.
According to a further aspect of the invention a compound of formula (1 ) in which Y is an -S(0)2- group may be prepared by the route set out in Scheme 7.
Scheme 7
Figure imgf000048_0001
Thus, a compound of formula (29) can be obtained by reaction of a compound of formula (28) with a metal amide base such as sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature of around 0°C and then adding di-tert- butyl dicarbonate in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and stirring at ambient temperature. A compound of formula (1 ) can then be prepared by the following reaction sequence. A compound of formula (29) is treated with a base such as an alkyl lithium, e.g. n-butyllithium, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature of around -78°C. Sulfur dioxide gas is bubbled through the reaction mixture before allowing the reaction to warm to room temperature. Solvents are removed in vacuo and the crude material dissolved in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, and the mixture treated with a chlorinating reagent such as Λ/-chlorosuccinimide at around ambient temperature. An amine of formula (3) can then be added to the reaction mixture to produce a compound of formula (30), where R = tert- butoxycarbonyl. A sulphonamide of formula (1) can then be prepared by treating a compound of formula (30) with an acid, e.g. a mineral acid such as HCl or an organic acid such as trifluoroacetic acid, in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane. Intermediates of formula (28) may be obtained by decarboxylation of compounds of formula (2) with an acid such as a mineral acid, e.g. HCl, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran or 1 ,4-dioxane, at a temperature from 50°C up to the reflux temperature. Where in the general processes described above intermediates such as alkylating agents of formula Cy1(Alk1)nZ, reagents of formula HSCH2C02Et and any other intermediates required in the synthesis of compounds of the invention are not available commercially or known in the literature, they may be readily obtained from simpler known compounds by one or more standard synthetic methods employing substitution, oxidation, reduction or cleavage reactions. Particular substitution approaches include conventional alkylation, arylation, heteroarylation, acylation, thioacylation, halogenation, sulphonylation, nitration, formylation and coupling procedures. It will be appreciated that these methods may also be used to obtain or modify other intermediates and in particular compounds of formula (1 ) where appropriate functional groups exist in these compounds. Particular examples of such methods are given in the Examples hereinafter.
Thus for example aromatic halogen substituents in the compounds may be subjected to halogen-metal exchange with a base, for example a lithium base such as n-butyl- or tert-butyllithium, optionally at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C, in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran and then quenched with an electrophile to introduce a desired substituent. Thus, for example, a formyl group may be introduced by using Λ/,Λ/-dimethylformamide as the electrophile, a thiomethyl group may be introduced by using dimethyldisulphide as the electrophile, an alcohol group may be introduced by using an aldehyde as the electrophile, and an acid may be introduced by using carbon dioxide as the electrophile. Aromatic acids of formula ArC02H may also be generated by quenching Grignard reagents of formula ArMgHal with carbon dioxide.
Aromatic acids of formula ArC02H generated by this method and acid- containing compounds in general may be converted to activated derivatives, e.g. acid halides, by reaction with a halogenating agent such as a thionyl halide, e.g. thionyl chloride, a phosphorus trihalide such as phosphorus trichloride, or a phosphorus pentahalide such as phosphorus pentachloride, optionally in an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, or a chlorinated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a temperature from about 0°C to the reflux temperature, or may be converted into Weinreb amides of formula ArC(0)N(OMe)Me by conversion to the acid halide as just described and subsequent reaction with an amine of formula HN(OMe)Me or a salt thereof, optionally in the presence of a base such as an organic amine, e.g. triethylamine, in an inert solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, or a chlorinated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a temperature from about 0°C to ambient temperature.
Ester groups such as -C02Alk6 and -C02R4 in the compound of formula (1 ) and intermediates thereto may be converted to the corresponding acid [-C02H] by acid- or base-catalysed hydrolysis depending on the nature of the group Alk6 or R4. Acid- or base-catalysed hydrolysis may be achieved for example by treatment with an organic or inorganic acid, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid, in an organic solvent, e.g. dichloromethane, or a mineral acid such as hydrochloric acid in a solvent such as 1 ,4-dioxane, or an alkali metal hydroxide, e.g. lithium hydroxide, in an aqueous alcohol, e.g. aqueous methanol.
In a further example, -OR6 [where R6 represents an alkyl group such as methyl] in compounds of formula (1) and intermediates thereto may be cleaved to the corresponding alcohol -OH by reaction with boron tribromide in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at a low temperature, e.g. around -78°C.
Alcohol [-OH] groups may also be obtained by hydrogenation of a corresponding -OCH2R31 group (where R31 is an aryl group) using a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon in a solvent such as ethanol in the presence of ammonium formate, cyclohexadiene or hydrogen, from around ambient to the reflux temperature. In another example, -OH groups may be generated from the corresponding ester [e.g. -C02Alk6] or aldehyde [-CHO] by reduction, using for example a complex metal hydride such as lithium aluminium hydride or sodium borohydride in a solvent such as methanol.
In another example, alcohol [-OH] groups in the compounds may be converted to a corresponding -OR6 group by coupling with a reagent R6OH in a solvent such as tetrahydrofuran in the presence of a phosphine, e.g. triphenylphosphine, and an activator such as diethyl, diisopropyl or dimethyl azodicarboxylate.
Aminosulphonylamino [-NHSO2NH2] groups in the compounds may be obtained, in another example, by reaction of a corresponding amine [-NH2] with sulphamide in the presence of an organic base such as pyridine at an elevated temperature, e.g. the reflux temperature.
In another example, compounds containing a -NHCSR7 or -CSNHR7 group may be prepared by treating a corresponding compound containing a -NHCOR7 or -CONHR7 group with a thiation reagent, such as Lawesson's Reagent or P2S5, in an anhydrous solvent, for example a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at an elevated temperature such as the reflux temperature.
In a further example, amine [-NH2] groups may be alkylated using a reductive alkylation process employing an aldehyde and a reducing agent. Suitable reducing agents include borohydrides, for example sodium triacetoxyborohyride or sodium cyanoborohydride. The reduction may be carried out in a solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, a ketone such as acetone, or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, where necessary in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid at around ambient temperature. Alternatively, the amine and aldehyde may be initially reacted in a solvent such as an aromatic hydrocarbon, e.g. toluene, and then subjected to hydrogenation in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon, in a solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.
In a further example, amine [-NH2] groups in compounds of formula (1 ) and intermediates thereto may be obtained by hydrolysis from a corresponding imide by reaction with hydrazine in a solvent such as an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, at ambient temperature.
In another example, a nitro [-N02] group may be reduced to an amine [-NH2], for example by catalytic hydrogenation using for example hydrogen in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium, on a support such as carbon in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or by chemical reduction using for example a metal, e.g. tin or iron, in the presence of an acid such as hydrochloric acid.
In a further example, amine [-CH2NH2] groups in compounds of formula (1) and intermediates thereto may be obtained by reduction of nitriles [-CN], for example by catalytic hydrogenation using for example hydrogen in the presence of a metal catalyst, for example palladium on a support such as carbon, or Raney® nickel, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, or an alcohol, e.g. methanol or ethanol, optionally in the presence of ammonia solution at a temperature from ambient to the reflux temperature, or by chemical reduction using for example a metal hydride, e.g. lithium aluminium hydride, in a solvent such as an ether, e.g. a cyclic ether such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature from 0°C to the reflux temperature. In another example, sulphur atoms in the compounds, for example when present in a group L1 or L2, may be oxidised to the corresponding sulphoxide or sulphone using an oxidising agent such as a peroxyacid, e.g. 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid, in an inert solvent such as a halogenated hydrocarbon, e.g. dichloromethane, at around ambient temperature.
In a further example Λ/-oxides of compounds of formula (1 ) may in general be prepared for example by oxidation of the corresponding nitrogen base as described above in relation to the preparation of intermediates of formula (5).
Salts of compounds of formula (1 ) may be prepared by reaction of compounds of formula (1 ) with an appropriate base in a suitable solvent or mixture of solvents, e.g. an organic solvent such as an ether, e.g. diethyl ether, or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, using conventional procedures.
Where it is desired to obtain a particular enantiomer of a compound of formula (1) this may be produced from a corresponding mixture of enantiomers using any suitable conventional procedure for resolving enantiomers.
Thus for example diastereomeric derivatives, e.g. salts, may be produced by reaction of a mixture of enantiomers of formula (1 ), e.g. a racemate, and an appropriate chiral compound, e.g. a chiral base. The diastereomers may then be separated by any convenient means, for example by crystallisation, and the desired enantiomer recovered, e.g. by treatment with an acid in the instance where the diastereomer is a salt.
In another resolution process a racemate of formula (1) may be separated using chiral High Performance Liquid Chromatography. Alternatively, if desired, a particular enantiomer may be obtained by using an appropriate chiral intermediate in one of the processes described above. Alternatively, a particular enantiomer may be obtained by performing an enantiomer-specific enzymatic biotransformation, e.g. an ester hydrolysis using an esterase, and then purifying only the enantiomerically pure hydrolysed acid from the unreacted ester antipode.
Chromatography, recrystallisation and other conventional separation procedures may also be used with intermediates or final products where it is desired to obtain a particular geometric isomer of the invention.
The following Examples illustrate the invention. All temperatures are in °C.
The following abbreviations are used:
NMM - A/-methylmorpholine; EtOAc - ethyl acetate;
MeOH - methanol; BOC - tert-butoxycarbonyl;
DCM - dichloromethane; AcOH - acetic acid; DIPEA - diisopropylethylamine; EtOH - ethanol;
Pyr - pyridine; Ar - aryl;
DMSO - dimethylsulphoxide; iPr - isopropyl;
Et20 - diethyl ether; Me - methyl;
THF - tetrahydrofuran; h - hour; MCPBA - 3-chloroperoxybenzoic acid; NBS - Λ/-bromosuccinimide;
FMOC - 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl; r.t. - room temperature;
DBU - 1 ,8-diazabicyclo[5,4,0]undec-7-ene;
EDC - 1-[3-(dimethylamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride;
HOBT - 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate; BINAP - 2,2'-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1-1'-binaphthyl;
DMF - Λ/,Λ/-dimethylformamide; dba - dibenzylideneacetone;
DME - ethylene glycol dimethyl ether; p.s.i. - pounds per square inch;
MTBE - methyl tert-butyl ether; m.p. - melting point. All NMRs were obtained either at 300MHz or 400MHz.
Compounds were named with the aid of either Beilstein Autonom supplied by MDL Information Systems GmbH, Theodor-Heuss-Allee 108, D-60486 Frankfurt, Germany, or ACD Labs Name (v.6.0) supplied by Advanced Chemical Development, Toronto, Canada.
LCMS retention times (RT) quoted were generated on a Hewlett Packard 1100 LC/MS using the following following method: Phenomenex Luna 3μCιs(2) 50 x 4.6mm column; mobile phase A = 0.1 % formic acid in water; mobile phase B = 0.1 % formic acid in MeCN; flow rate of 0.9mLmin"1, column temperature 40°C.
Gradient:-
Figure imgf000055_0001
Where stated alternative LCMS conditions (Conditions B) were used: LCMS retention times (RT) quoted were generated on a Hewlett Packard 1100/ThermoFinnigan LCQ Duo LC/MS system using Electrospray ionisation and the following LC method: Phenomenex Luna C-ι8(2) 5μ 100mm x 4.6mm column; mobile phase A = 0.08% formic acid in water; mobile phase B = 0.08% formic acid in MeCN; flow rate of 3.0 mLmin"1, column temperature 35°C. Gradient:
Figure imgf000056_0001
Intermediate 1
Ethyl 3-aminothienor2,3-fo]pyridine-2-carboxylate A mixture of 2-chloro-3-cyanopyridine (330g, 2.3mol), ethyl 2- mercaptoacetate (361.2g, 3.0mol), sodium carbonate (265g, 2.5mol) and EtOH (1.2L) was heated to reflux for 4.5 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient temperature and added to water (15L). The resultant precipitate was stirred for 30 minutes and then filtered. The filter cake was washed with two portions of water (2 x 2.5L) and dried to constant weight under vacuum at 45°C to yield the title compound as a brown solid (493.1g, 93.2%). δH (CDCI3) 8.68 (1 H, dd, J 4.7, 1.2Hz), 7.93 (1 H, dd, J 8.5, 1.2Hz), 7.29 (1H, dd, J 8.5, 4.7Hz), 5.90 (2H, b), 4.38 (2H, q, J 7.0Hz), 1.40 (3H, t, J 7.0Hz). LCMS RT 2.9 minutes, 223 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 2
Ethyl 3-bromothienor2,3-i 1pyridine-2-carboxylate
Intermediate 1 (363.6g) was added in portions over two hours to a mixture of copper(ll) bromide (403.3g), tert-butyl nitrite (220.6g) and acetonitrile (3.6L) stirred at a temperature of 20 to 25°C. The mixture was stirred at 20°C for 2 hours before it was slowly added to 2M HCI(aq) (4.2L). The reaction mixture slurry was filtered and the solids were washed with water (500mL). The combined filtrate was extracted with ethyl acetate (8L); this ethyl acetate solution was washed with 2M HCI(aq) (2.2L). The solids were dissolved in ethyl acetate (6L); this solution was washed twice with 2M HCI(aq) (4.4L and 2.2L). The two ethyl acetate solutions were then combined and washed with 2M HCI(aq) (2.2L) and twice with water (2 x 2L). The ethyl acetate solution was then dried (MgS0 ), filtered and concentrated in vacuo at 40 mbar and 60°C to give a solid residue. This was broken up and dried to constant weight under vacuum at 45°C to yield the title compound as a brown solid (458.5g, 97.9%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.89 (1 H, d, J 4.7Hz), 8.47 (1 H, d, J 8.6Hz), 7.71 (1 H, dd, J 8.6, 4.7Hz), 4.46 (2H, q, J 7.2Hz), 1.40 (3H, t, J 7.2Hz). LCMS RT 3.8 minutes, 288 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 3
Ethyl 3-Bromothienor2,3-fo]pyridine-2-carboxylate JV-oxide
To a slurry of Intermediate 2 (214g, 0.747mol) in DCM (2140mL) under nitrogen was added 70% mCPBA (240g, 0.97mol) portionwise over 0.5 h. The reaction was then stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (800mL) and pH adjusted to 8.5 with 10%w/v sodium carbonate solution (1250mL). The basic aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer washed with water until pH 7. The organic layer was concentrated in vacuo and the crude title product was recovered as a tan solid. The crude product was purified by slurrying in MTBE (600mL) for 1 h at 0-5°C to give the title compound (174g, 77%). δH (CDCI3) 8.44 (1 H, dd, J 6.2, 0.8Hz), 7.87 (1 H, dd, J 8.3, 0.8Hz), 7.48 (1 H, dd, J 8.3, 6.2Hz), 4.49 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.48 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.61 minutes, 302 (M+H)+
Intermediate 4
Ethyl 3-bromo-6-oxo-6,7-dihvdrothienor2,3-ά1pyridine-2-carboxylate
To a suspension of Intermediate 3 (95g, 0.32mol) in DMF (950mL) and stirred at room temperature was added trifluoroacetic anhydride (198g,
131 mL, 0.94mol) dropwise over a 30 minute period (slight exotherm observed). After complete addition the reaction was stirred for a further 45 minutes at room temperature. The excess trifluoroacetic anhydride was removed under vacuum and the reaction mixture concentrated to approximately half the original volume. The resulting dark coloured solution was then poured onto a mixture of water (1 L) and toluene (400mL). The mixture was left to stand for around 10 minutes and then the precipitate was collected by filtration. The precipitate was washed with toluene (3 x 50mL) and then dried in a vacuum oven at 50-60°C. This gave the title compound as a beige coloured solid (68.5g, 72.1 %). δH (DMSO-d6) 12.20 (1 H, brs), 7.75 (1 H, d, J 9.0Hz), 6.50 (1H, d, J 9.0Hz), 4.15 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.12 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.86 minutes, 302 (M+H)+. m.p. 261.7-268.1°C.
Intermediate 5
Ethyl 3-bromo-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 -dihvdrothienof2,3-fc1pyridine-2- carboxylate Method A
A 3L jacketed vessel was charged with Intermediate 4 (100g, 0.332mol), Cul (15.8g, 0.083mol), phenylboronic acid (80g, 0.664mol), pyridine (104g, 1.32mol) and acetonitrile (2.0L) and the mixture stirred at 40°C. Compressed air was vigorously blown through the reaction mixture for 6 hours. The compressed air was then turned off and the reaction mixture left to stir at 40°C overnight. The next day the same process was repeated. After approximately 36 hours, HPLC indicated >97% conversion of starting material to the product. The resulting dark coloured reaction mixture was poured onto a mixture of water (1.2L) and concentrated hydrochloric acid (300mL). The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (2 X 1.5L) and the combined organics washed with 2M HCI(aq) (2 x 1.5L). The organic layer was separated, passed through a pad of MgS04, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was recrystallised from toluene (600ml) to give the title compound as a beige solid (93.85g, 75.0%). δH (CDCI3) 7.82 (1 H, d, J 8.5Hz), 7.70-7.62 (3H, m), 7.54-7.42 (2H, m), 6.70 (1 H, d, J 8.5Hz), 4.15 (2H, q, J 7.1Hz), 1.14 (3H, t, J 7.1Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.75 minutes, 378 (M+H)+. MP = 201.6-206.0°C. Method B (alternative procedure)
To a 2 necked round bottomed flask was added in sequence Intermediate 4 (302mg, LOOmmol), copper(ll) acetate (278mg, 1.50mmol), phenylboronic acid (488mg, 4.00mmol), DCM (5mL) and pyridine (158mg, 2.00mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 18 h with the exclusion of moisture. The reaction was then diluted with DCM (50mL), washed with 2M HCI(aq) (50mL), the aqueous was re-extracted with DCM (50mL). The combined organics were then washed with water (50mL), dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by a slurry in methanol (12mL), to give the title compound as a beige solid (270mg, 72%). δH (CDCI3) 7.82 (1 H, d, J 8.5Hz), 7.70-7.62 (3H, m), 7.54-7.42 (2H, m), 6.70 (1 H, d, J 8.5Hz), 4.15 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.14 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.75 minutes, 378 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 6
Ethyl 3-bromo-7-(4-methylphenyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2,3- frlpyridine-2-carboxylate A flask was charged with Intermediate 4 (15.1g, O.Oδmol), copper(ll) acetate (13.62g, 0.075mol), 4-tolylboronic acid (14.0g, 0.1 mol), DCM (500mL) and pyridine (25mL, 0.3mol) and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 24 h. The reaction mixture was washed with 2M HCl (2 x 200mL), 5% NaOH (aq) (200mL), brine (200mL) and dried (MgS04). Solvent was removed in vacuo and the resultant solid triturated with methanol to give the title compound as a solid (15.7g). δH (CDCI3) 7.76 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.33 (2H, d, J 8.3Hz), 7.18 (2H, d, J 8.3Hz), 6.64 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.24 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 2.39 (3H, s), 1.26 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.86 minutes, 394 (M+H)+. Intermediate 7
Ethyl 3-bromo-7-(4-fluorophenvπ-6-oxo-6,7-dihvdrothienor2,3- blpyrιdine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 4 and 4-fluorophenylboronic acid by the method of Intermediate 6. White solid. δH (CDCI3) 7.84 (1H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.41-7.37 (2H, m), 7.32-7.25 (2H, m), 6.72 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.33 (2H, q, J 7.1Hz), 1.34 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.729 minutes, 397.8 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 8 Ethyl 3-bromo-7-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2.3- folpyrιdine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 4 and 4-chlorophenylboronic acid by the method of Intermediate 6. δH (CDCI3) 7.86 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.60 (2H, d, J 8.5Hz), 7.37 (2H, d, J 8.5Hz), 6.74 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.35 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.36 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.937 minutes, 413 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 9
Ethyl 3-bromo-7-(3-methylphenyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2.3- folpyridine-2-carboxylate From Intermediate 4 and 3-methylphenylboronic acid by the method of Intermediate 6. δH (CDCI3) 7.85 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.51-7.48 (1 H, m), 7.38- 7.27 (1 H, m), 7.29 (2H, br m), 6.75 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.34 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 2.46 (3H, s), 1.35 (3H, t, J 7.1Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.865 minutes, 393 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 11
Ethyl 3-bromo-7-(cvclopropylmethyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihydrothienor2,3- lblpyridine-2-carboxylate
Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil) (3.27g, 81.4mmol) was added in portions to a solution of Intermediate 4 (22.3g, 74mmol) in DMF (300mL) at 0°C. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 30 min then cyclopropylmethyl bromide (10g, 74mmol) was added slowly and the mixture heated at 60°C overnight. The DMF was removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between EtOAc and brine. The organic phase was dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 0% to 10% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound as a yellow solid (12.5g, 47%). δH (CDCI3) 7.57 (1H, d, J 9.5Hz), 6.47 (1H, d, J 9.5Hz), 4.22 (2H, q, J 7.0Hz), 3.87 (2H, d, J 7.1 Hz), 1.26-1.19 (4H, m), 0.43-0.37 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.80 minutes, 357 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 12
Ethyl 3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihydrothienor2,3-fr|pyridine-2-carboxylate
Intermediate 5 (1.00g, 2.64mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (0.121g, 0.132mmol) and BINAP (0.164g, 0.264mmol) were stirred in toluene (12mL) for 5 min. 4-Fluoro-3-methylaniline (0.397g, 3.172mmol) and cesium carbonate (1.205g, 3.701 mmol) were added and the mixture was heated at reflux under N2 for 24 h. The mixture was dissolved in THF (100mL) and washed with water. The combined organics were dried (Na2S04) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was triturated with MeOH to produce the title compound as a white solid (0.754q). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.72 (1 H, s), 7.67- 7.60 (3H, m), 7.51-7.49 (2H, m), 7.18-7.10 (3H, m), 7.09-6.99 (1 H, m), 6.39 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 4.15 (2H, q, J 7.07 Hz), 2.22 (3H, s), 1.72 (3H, t, J 7.08 Hz). LCMS (ES+) 423 (M+H) +.
Intermediate 13
Ethyl 3-r(2,4-difluorophenv0amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (1.21g, 1.32mmol) was added to a mixture of Intermediate 5 (10g, 26.4mmol), caesium carbonate (12.05g, 37.0mmol), 2,4-difluoroaniline (4.1g, 3.23mL, 31.7mmol) and BINAP (1.65g, 2.64mmol) in anhydrous toluene (80mL) and the reaction heated to reflux under nitrogen for 4 days. The reaction was cooled, partitioned between DCM and water and the organic phase dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated in vacuo. The crude residue was triturated with methanol to give the title compound as a white solid (9.87g). δH (CDCI3) 8.49 (1 H, bs), 7.58-7.40 (3H, m), 7.32-7.25 (2H, m), 7.13-7.04(1 H, m), 7.01 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 6.93-6.86 (1 H, m), 6.82-6.75 (1 H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J, 9.8Hz), 4.20 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.23 (3H, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.06 minutes, 427 (M+H)+.
General procedure for the preparation of ethyl 3-anilino-6-oxo-7-phenyl- 6 -dihydrothienof2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate intermediates
The Intermediate esters 14-26 were prepared following a procedure similar to that described for Intermediate 13. Therefore to an oven dried reaction flask was added a magnetic stirrer, the appropriate substituted aniline (1.2 equiv.), anhydrous toluene, Intermediate 5 (1.0 equiv.), caesium carbonate (1.4equiv.), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (5 mol %) and BINAP (10 mol %). The reactions were heated to reflux under nitrogen and with magnetic stirring for 24-48 h. Each reaction was then diluted with DCM, washed with water, dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude products were either purified on silica eluting with a gradient of EtOAc in DCM or alternatively by trituration with methanol or ethyl acetate to give the title compounds as solids.
Intermediate 14 Ethyl 3-anilino-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7-dihvdrothienor2,3-i 1pyridine-2- carboxylate
From Intermediate 5 and aniline to give the title compound as a white solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.70 (1 H, bs), 7.57-7.47 (3H, m), 7.33-7.25 (4H, m), 7.20-7.10 (4H, m), 6.27 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.19 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.22 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.10 minutes, 391 (M+H)+. Intermediate 15
Ethyl 3-r(2-chlorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7-dihvdrothienor2,3- i lpyridine-2-carboxylate
From 2-chloroaniline and Intermediate 5 to give the title compound as a solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.60 (1 H, bs), 7.56-7.48 (3H, m), 7.40-7.38 (1 H, m), 7.36-7.32 (2H, m), 7.20-7.15 (2H, m), 7.14-7.05 (1H, m), 7.05-6.98 (1H, m), 6.35 (1H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.21 (2H q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.23 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.38 minutes, 425 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 16
Ethyl 3-f(3-cvanophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7-dihvdrothienor2,3- blpyridine-2-carboxylate
From 3-cyanoaniline and Intermediate 5 to give the title compound an off- white solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.58 (1 H, bs), 7.61-7.43 (3H, m), 7.40-7.20 (6H, m), 7.14 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 6.38 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.19 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.23 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.78 minutes, 416 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 17
Ethyl 3-r(2-cvanophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7-dihydrothienor2,3- blpyridine-2-carboxylate
From 2-cyanoaniline and Intermediate 5 to give the title compound. δH (CDCI3) 8.72 (1 H, bs), 7.61-7.47 (4H, m), 7.43-7.40 (1 H, m), 7.36-7.31 (2H, m), 7.22-7.15 (1 H, m), 7.11-7.00 (2H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.22 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.24 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.80 minutes, 416 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 20
Ethyl 3-r(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7- dihvdrothienof2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 5 and 3-chloro-4-fluoroaniline to give the title compound as a solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.70 (1 H, s), 7.67-7.59 (3H, m), 7.44-7.41 (2H, m), 7.24-7.02 (4H, m), 6.43 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.28 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 1.31 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.245 minutes, 443 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 22 Ethyl 3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-6,7- dihydrothienor2.3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 8 and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline to give the title compound as a solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.72 (1 H, br s), 7.58-7.38 (2H, m), 7.35-7.28 (2H, m), 6.99-6.98 (4H, m), 6.34 (1H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.28 (2H, q, J 7.1Hz), 2.29 (3H, s), 1.32 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.57 minutes, 457 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 23
Ethyl 3-rf4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(3-methylphenyl)-6-oxo-6,7- dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate From Intermediate 9 and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline to give the title compound as a solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.63 (1 H, br s), 7.40-7.15 (1 H, m), 7.30-7.27 (1 H, m), 7.18-7.10 (2H,m), 7.04-6.90 (4H, m), 6.27 (1H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.18 (2H, q, J 7.1Hz), 2.21 (3H, s), 2.20 (3H, s), 1.21 (3H, t, J 7.1Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.469 minutes, 437 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 24
Ethyl 3-r(3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(3-methylphenvD-6-oxo-6,7- dihvdrothienor2,3-frlpyridine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 9 and 3-methylaniline to give the title compound as a solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.55 (1 H, br s), 7.32-7.28 (1 H, m), 7.27-7.17 (1 H, m), 7.08- 7.00 (4H, m), 7.88-7.75 (3H, m), 6.15 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.08 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 2.27 (3H, s), 2.17 (3H, s), 1.12 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.543 minutes, 419 (M+H)+. Intermediate 26
Ethyl 3-anilino-7-fcvclopropylmethvπ-6-oxo-6.7-dihvdrothienor2,3- frlpyridine-2-carboxylate
From Intermediate 11 and aniline to give the title compound. Pale yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.71 (1 H, br s), 7.29-7.22 (2H, m), 7.10-6.97 (4H, m), 6.18 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.27 (2H, q, J 7.1 Hz), 3.94 (2H, d, J 7.2Hz), 1.40-1.33 (1 H, m), 1.32 (3H, t, J 7.1 Hz), 0.53-0.48 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.79 minutes, 369.0 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 27
Lithium 3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7- dihydrothienor2,3-blpyridine-2-carboxylate
Intermediate 12 (0.494g, 1.170mmol) was dissolved in EtOH/THF/H20 (2:1 :1 ) (20mL), heated to 80°C and treated with LiOH.H20 (0.054g, 1.287mmol). Reaction was continued until no starting material remained (as judged by TLC). The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue azeotroped with toluene to give the title compound as a beige solid (0.284g). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.81-7.75 (3H, m), 7.64-7.62 (2H, m), 7.41-7.38 (1 H, d, J 9.55 Hz), 7.20-7.15 (1 H, t, J 9.01 Hz), 7.04-7.03 (1 H, br m), 6.93-6.90 (1 H, br m), 6.48-6.46 (1 H, d, J 9.54 Hz), 2.35 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) 395 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 28
Lithium 3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 13 (6.34g, 14.9mmol) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (686mg, 16.4mmol) following the method of intermediate 27. δH (DMSO-d6) 10.04 (1 H, bs), 7.81 (3H, m), 7.69 (2H, m), 7.50 (1 H, m), 7.48 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.16 (2H, m), 7.56 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz). Intermediate 29
Ammonium 6-oxo-3-(phenylamino)-7-phenyl-6.7-dihvdrothienor2,3- blPyridine-2-carboxylate
A solution of sodium hydroxide (339mg, 8.5mmol, Hequiv.) in water (20mL) was added to a suspension of Intermediate 14 (3.0g, 7.7mmol, LOequiv.) in ethanol (50mL) and the mixture heated at reflux for 2 h. The bulk of the ethanol was removed in vacuo and the residue treated with sat. ammonium chloride solution(aq) (30mL). The resultant solid was collected by filtration, washed with water (2 x 20mL), Et20 (2 x 20mL) and dried in vacuo at room temperature to give the title compound as a white solid in quantitative yield. δH (DMSO-d6) 9.60 (1 H, bs), 7.65-7.57 (3H, m), 7.49-7.46 (2H, m), 7.29-7.18 (3H, m), 6.97-6.91 (3H, m), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.24 minutes, 363 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 30
Sodium 7-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-6-oxo- 6,7-dihydrothienor2,3-frlpyridine-2-carboxylate
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 22 (1.0g, 2.1mmol) and sodium hydroxide (100mg, 2.6mmol, 1.2equiv.) following a procedure analogous to that used for Intermediate 29. Instead of treating with a saturated ammonium chloride solution the volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue triturated with EtOAc to give the title compound as a solid (800mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.74 (1 H, bs), 7.67 (2H, dd, J 6.6, 2.1 Hz), 7.54 (2H, dd, J 6.6, 2.1 Hz), 7.24 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.20-7.01 (1 H, m), 6.90-6.80 (1 H, m), 6.85-6.75 (1 H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 9.5Hz), 4.68 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.51 minutes, 429 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 31
Sodium 3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(3-methylphenyl)-6-oxo- 6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 23 (1.0g, 2.2mmol) and sodium hydroxide (183mg, 4.4mmol) following the procedure of Intermediate 30 to give the title compound as a solid (1.0g). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.56 (1 H, t, J 7.7Hz), 7.44 (1 H, d, J 7.7Hz), 7.38-7.24 (3H, m), 7.07 (1 H, t, J 9.1 Hz), 6.96- 6.91 (1 H, m), 6.88-6.75 (1 H, m), 6.37 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 2.47 (3H, s), 2.25 (3H, s).
Intermediate 32
Sodium 3-r(3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(3-methylphenyl)-6-oxo-6.7- dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 24 (1.0g, 2.3mmol) and sodium hydroxide (140mg, 3.5mmol) following the procedure of Intermediate 30 to give the title compound as a solid (842mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.81 (1 H, bs), 7.55 (1 H, t, J 7.6Hz), 7.47 (1 H, d, J 12Hz), 7.42-7.24 (3H, m), 7.18 (1 H, t, J 7.7Hz), 6.80-6.75 (3H, m), 6.37 (1 H, J 9.5Hz), 2.46 (3H, s), 2.31 (3H, s).
Intermediate 33
Sodium 3-r(3-Chloro-4-fluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7- dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 20 (1.0g, 2.2mmol) and sodium hydroxide (100mg, 2.69mmol) following the procedure of Intermediate 30 to give the title compound as a solid (680mg). δH (DMSO- d6) 9.78 (1 H, bs), 7.61-7.59 (3H, m), 7.55-7.46 (2H, m), 7.30-7.24 (2H, m), 7.09-7.06 (1 H, m), 6.90-6.88 (1 H, m), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.4 Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.41 minutes, 414 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 34
Pentafluorophenyl 3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-
6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate EDC (0.163g, 0.852mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 27 (0.284g, 0.710mmol) in DMF (10mL) and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 30 min. Pentafluorophenol (0.196g, 1.065mmol) was added and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 24 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in DCM which was then washed with water, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 50% Hexane/EtOAc) to produce the title compound as a white solid (0.226g). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.96 (1 H, s), 7.07-6.95 (5H, br m), 7.55-7.39 (4H, br m), 6.29 (1 H, d, J 9.86 Hz), 2.08 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) 561 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 35 Pentafluorophenyl 3-r(2,4-difluorophenvQamino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihvdrothienof2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 28 following the method of Intermediate 34 to give the product as a white solid. δH (CDCI3) 8.66 (1 H, bs), 7.76 (3H, m), 7.58 (2H, m), 7.47 (1 H, m), 7.14 (3H, m), 6.54 (1 H, d, J 9.9Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.57 minutes, 565 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 36
3-Bromo-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7-dihydrothienor2,3-blpyridine-2-carboxylic acid Sodium hydroxide (1.83g, 45.8mmol, 1.1 equiv.) was added to a suspension of Intermediate 5 (15.75g, 41.6mmol, LOequiv.) in ethanol (78mL) and water (78ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was then heated to reflux. Once reflux was attained the solid material had gone into solution and analysis by HPLC indicated complete conversion to the acid. The reaction mixture was then cooled to ~70°C and c.hydrochloric acid (46ml) added over a 10 minute period. The reaction was allowed to cool to room temperature and the resultant solid collected by filtration, washed with water (3 x 25ml) and dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a beige solid (13.81g, 97%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.13 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.92-7.80 (3H, m), 7.78-7.74 (2H, m), 6.92 (1H, d, J 9.6Hz). Intermediate 37
3-Bromo-7-(4-methylphenvπ-6-oxo-6.7-dihvdrothienor2,3-fo1pyridine-2- carboxylic acid
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 6 (16.0g, 40.3mmol) following the method of Intermediate 36 to give the product as a solid (13.84g). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.85 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.45-7.38 (4H, m), 6.65 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 2.42 (3H, s).
Intermediate 38 3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenvπ-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2- carboxylic acid
A solution of lithium hydroxide monohydrate (0.87g, 20.8mmol) in water (30mL) was added to a solution of Intermediate 7 (5.5g, 13.9mmol) in dioxane (100mL) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 4 h. Concentrated hydrochloric acid was added dropwise until the product had precipitated. The resultant solid was collected by filtration, washed with water (2 x 30mL), diethyl ether (2 x 30mL) and dried in a vacuum oven to give the title compound as a solid (4.65g, 91 %). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.66 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.43-7.38 (2H, m), 7.30-7.24 (2H, m), 6.46 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz).
Intermediate 39
3-Bromo-2-{r(2 ?)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7- phenylthienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7/y)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 36 (10. Og, 28.6mmol) and DMF (2 drops) in THF (150mL) was added oxalyl chloride (3.26mL, 37.4mmol), via syringe, over a 30 minute period. The reaction mixture was stirred for a further 30 minutes at room temperature before removing solvent and excess reagent in vacuo to give the intermediate acid chloride as a beige solid. This acid chloride was dissolved in DCM (150mL) and added over 45 minutes to a mixture of (R)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (2.88g, 28.5mmol) and triethylamine (4.36mL, 31.3mmol) in lOOmL of dichloromethane. After complete addition the reaction was stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was poured onto water (200mL), the DCM layer separated and the aqueous re-extracted with DCM (100mL). The combined organic layers were then washed with water (200mL), dried (MgS0 ) and evaporated to give the title compound as a light brown solid (12.83g). δH (CDCI3) 7.70 (1H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.50-7.60 (3H, m), 7.35-7.45 (2H, m), 6.75 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.25-4.35 (1 H, m), 4.00 (1 H, br s), 3.45-3.80 (4H, m), 1.52-2.55 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT
2.52 minutes, 433.1 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 40
3-Bromo-2-{r(2ffl-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7-(4- methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a suspension of Intermediate 37 (6.4g, 17.5mmol) in DCM (80mL) was added EDC (5.04g, 26mmol) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 1 h. (R)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol (2.6mL, 26mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for 18 h at room temperature. The reaction was diluted with DCM (10mL), washed with brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by chromatography (silica, 30-50% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid (3.44g, 43%). δH (CDCI3) 7.65 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.37 (2H, d, J 8.2Hz), 7.20-7.19 (2H, m), 6.66 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.25-4.23 (1H, m), 3.80-3.40 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.13-2.04 (1H, m), 1.79-
1.53 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.92 minutes, 449 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 41 3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-{r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7 /)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 38 and (R)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol following the method described for Intermediate 40 to give the product as a solid. LCMS (ES+) RT 2.83 minutes, 452 (M+H)+. Intermediate 42
3-Bromo-7-phenyl-2-({(2R)-2-rftetrahvdro-2tf-pyran-2- yloxy)methvπpyrrolidin-1-yl>carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a 1L round bottomed flask was added the Intermediate 39 (12.5g, 28.8mmol), dihydropyran (12.1g, 144.8mmol), p-toluenesulphonic acid (55mg, 0.29mmol) and dichloromethane (5000mL). The reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was poured onto water (200mL), saturated brine (100mL) and sodium bicarbonate solution (100mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer re- extracted with dichloromethane (100mL). The combined organic layers were then washed with the above aqueous mixture, dried (MgS04) and evaporated to dryness. Purification by column chromatography (270g silica gel) eluting with ethyl acetate gave the title compound as a light brown solid/foam (12.73g). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.80 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.70-7.45 (5H, m), 6.60 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.50 (1H, m), 4.15 (1H, br s), 3.35-3.80 (6H, m), 1.30-2.00 (10H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.65 minutes, 519.1 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 43
3-Bromo-7-(4-methylphenvn-2-( (2ffl-2-r(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl}carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 40 (3.44g, 7.6mmol) following the procedure used for Intermediate 42. This gave the title compound as a light brown solid (4.85g). δH (CDCI3) 7.63 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.28 (2H, d, J 7.8Hz), 7.17 (2H, m), 6.63 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.48-4.28 (2H, m), 3.85-3.30 (6H, m), 2.36 (3H, s), 2.15-1.70 (7H, m), 1.48-1.46 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.69 minutes, 533 (M)+.
Intermediate 44
3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-({(2ffl-2-r(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl|carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 41 (1.0g, 2.21 mmol) following the procedure used for Intermediate 42. This gave the title compound as a light brown oil (0.95g). δH (CDCI3) 7.90 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.69 (2H, m), 7.56 (2H, t, J 8.7Hz), 6.73 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.61-4.57 (1 H, m), 3.97-3.37 (8H, m), 1.97-1.50 (9H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.51 minutes, 560 (M+Na)+.
Intermediate 45
3-r(2.4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-7-phenyl-2-f((2ffl-2-r(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran- 2-yloxy)methyllPyrrolidin-1-yl carbonvπthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7fy)-one
To a dry 500ml 2 necked round bottomed flask, fitted with nitrogen inlet/outlet, was added Cs2C03 (11.2g, 31.7mmol), (+/-)-BINAP (1.53g, 2.46mmol), Intermediate 42 (12.73g, 24.6mmol) and Pd2(dba)3 (1.12g, 1.22mmol). To this mixture was added anhydrous toluene (200mL), which had been thoroughly degassed, and then 2,4-difluoroaniline (3.49g, 27.0mmol) and the reaction heated at reflux under nitrogen for 48 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient and then poured onto 1.0M HCI(aq) (300mL). This was extracted with dichloromethane (2 x 100mL) and the combined organics washed with 1.0M HCI(aq) (2 x 300mL), dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo to give a brown oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 3:2 ethyl acetate: heptane) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (7.32g). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.75 (1 H, s), 7.75 (1 H, d, J 8.3Hz), 7.70-7.60 (3H, m), 7.55-7.43 (2H, m), 7.35-7.22 (1 H, m), 7.05-6.88 (2H, m), 6.50 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.62 (1 H, bs), 4.45-4.30 (1 H, m), 3.65-2.75 (6H, m), 1.90-1.20 (10H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.01 minutes, 566 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 46
3-r(3-Methylphenyl)amino1-7-phenyl-2-ff(2 ?)-2-r(tetrahvdro-2i/-pyran-2- yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl carbonyl)thienof213-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 42 (2.5g, 4.84mmol) and m-toluidine (0.62mL, 5.8mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as an orange solid (2.27g). δH (CDCI3) 7.76 (3H, m), 7.66 (3H, m), 7.30 (1 H, m), 7.00 (3H, m), 6.54 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.68 (1 H, m), 4.65 (1 H, m), 3.90-3.50 (6H, m), 2.46 (3H, s), 2.10-1.50 (10H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.99 minutes, 544 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 47
3-r(3-Chlorophenyl)amino1-7-phenyl-2-(((2ffl-2-r(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy)methvπpyrrolidin-1-yl carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6f7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 42 (1.7g, 3.3mmol) and 3-choroaniline (0.42mL, 3.9mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a brown solid (900mg). δH (CDCl3) 7.66 (3H, m), 7.35 (3H, m), 7.19 (1 H, m), 6.94 (2H, m), 6.93 (1 H, m), 6.42 (1 H, d, J 9.67Hz), 4.53 (1 H, m), 4.48 (1 H, m), 3.75-3.36 (6H, m), 2.00-1.4 (10H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.90 minutes, 564 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 48
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-7-(4-methylphenvπ-2-(((2R)-2-r(tetrahvdro- 2H-pyran-2-yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl>carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin- 6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 43 (1.5g, 2.8mmoI) and 2,4-difluoroaniline (0.35mL, 3.3mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a solid (1.14g, 69%). δH (CDCI3) 9.33 (1 H, bs), 7.39-7.30 (2H, m), 7.19-7.14 (3H, m), 6.96 (1 H, dd, J 14.6, 9.1 Hz), 6.84 (1 H, t, J 2.6Hz), 6.73 (1 H, t, J 8.2Hz), 6.35 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.48-4.38 (2H, m), 3.75-3.30 (6H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 1.97-1.50 (4H, m), 1.49-1.25 (6H, m). Intermediate 49
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-7-(4-methylphenyl)-2-(((2ffl-2- r tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2-yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1- yl}carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 43 (1.5g, 2.8mmol) and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline (0.42mL, 3.3mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a solid (879mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.41 (1 H, bs), 7.48-7.38 (2H, m), 7.28-7.13 (4H, m), 6.84-6.74 (3H, m), 6.30 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.46-4.36 (2H, m), 3.71-3.25 (6H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.15 (3H, s), 1.96- 1.54 (6H, m), 1.45-1.40 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.21 minutes, 576 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 50
7-(4-Methylphenvπ-3-r 3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-(f(2R)-2-r(tetrahvdro- 2H-pyran-2-yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl carbonyl)thienor2,3-blpyridin- 6(7tf)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 43 (1.5g, 2.8mmol) and m-toluidine (0.37mL, 3.3mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a solid (1.0g, 63%). δH (CDCI3) 9.29 (1 H, m), 7.30-7.19 (5H, m), 7.09 (1 H, t, J 8.3Hz), 6.78-6.76 (3H, m), 6.32 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.48- 4.36 (2H, m), 3.76-3.32 (6H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 2.23 (3H, s), 1.97-1.58 (6H, m), 1.54-1.42 (4H, m).
Intermediate 51
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenvπamino1-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(f(2 ?)-2-r(tetrahvdro- 2tf-pyran-2-yloxy)methyllpyrrolidin-1-yl>carbonvπthienor2,3-blpyridin- 6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 44 (0.48g, 0.896mmol) and 2,4-difluoroaniline (0.11 mL, 1.08mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a yellow solid (206mg, 39%). LCMS RT 3.87 minutes, 606 (M+Na)+. Intermediate 52
3-rf4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvnamino1-7- 4-fluorophenvn-2-f (2R)-2- r(tetrahvdro-2tf-pyran-2-yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1- yl>carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6^7i )-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 44 (0.48g, 0.896mmol) and 3-methyl-4-fluoroaniline (0.135g, 1.08mmol) following the method of Intermediate 45 to give the product as a solid (90mg). δH (CDCI3) LCMS RT 3.94 minutes, 581 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 53
3-Amino-7-(2-chlorophenvπ-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2- carbonitrile
Acetonitrile (10mL) was added to a solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (100mL, 1.0M in THF, lOOmmol) in THF (50mL) at -78°C to give a thick white precipitate. 2-Chlorophenyl isothiocyanate (7.72g, 45.45mmol) was added to give a brown solution. The mixture was allowed to warm to r.t. over 1 h then diluted with EtOH (50mL). Λ/,Λ/-Dimethyluracil (6.4g, 45mmol) was added and the mixture heated at reflux for 24 h. Volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in acetonitrile (100mL). Chloroacetonitrile (2.85mL, 45mmol) was added and the mixture heated at 50°C for 1 h, a second charge of chloroacetonitrile (2.85mL, 45mmol) was added and heating continued for 1.5 h. Some of the acetonitrile (~50mL) was removed in vacuo and water was added to precipitate the product. The brown solid was filtered off, washed with water (50mL) and Et20 (50mL) and dried to give the title compound as a brown solid (14.3g, quant). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.10 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.75-7.73 (1 H, m), 7.65-7.54 (3H, m), 7.14 (2H, br s, NH2), 6.54 (1H, d, J 9.7Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.97 minutes, 302 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 54 3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-6,7-dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridine-2- carbonitrile Intermediate 53 (1.17g, 3.88mmol) was suspended in acetonitrile (20mL). Copper(ll) bromide (953mg, 4.27mmol) was added followed by tert-butyl nitrite (0.64mL, 5.43mmol). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 3 h then partitioned between 2M HCl aq (100mL) and EtOAc (100mL). The organic layer was washed with 2M HCl aq (50mL), 2M NaOH aq (50mL) and water (25mL), dried (Na2S0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 0 to 5% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound as a pale brown solid (980mg, 67%). δH (CDCI3) 7.70 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.61 (1 H, dd, J 1.7, 7.7Hz), 7.52-7.44 (2H, m), 7.34 (1 H, dd, J 1.7, 7.7Hz), 6.70 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.56 minutes, 365 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 55
3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2.3-b1pyridine-2- carboxylic acid A mixture of Intermediate 54 (1.86g, δ.Ommol) in methanol (50mL) and 2M NaOH aq (30mL) was heated at reflux for 1.5 h. Volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue treated with 2M HCl aq (75mL). The mixture was stirred at r.t. overnight to give a fine off-white precipitate. The solid was filtered off and dried to give the title compound as an off-white solid (1.80g, 92%). δH (DMSO-d6) 13.δ3 (1 H, br s), 7.7δ (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.64-7.62 (1 H, m), 7.δ6-7.δ4 (1 H, m), 7.51-7.42 (2H, m), 6.52 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.13 minutes, 384 (35CI79Br) (M+H)+.
Intermediate 56 3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenyl)-2-fr 2ffl-2- hvdroxymethvnpyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Thionyl chloride (0.66mL, 9.1 mmol) was added to a suspension of Intermediate δδ (1.7δg, 4.5δmmol) in chloroform (δOmL). The mixture was heated at δ0°C for 1 h. A second charge of thionyl chloride (0.66mL, 9.1 mmol) was added and the mixture heated at δ0°C for a further 1 h then stirred at r.t. overnight and finally heated at reflux for a further 1 h to give a solution. Volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in DCM (30mL). Triethylamine (0.25mL, 9.1 mmol) and (/ )-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.540mL, δ.46mmol) were added and the solution stirred at r.t. for 3 h. DCM (δOmL) was added and the mixture washed with 2M HCl aq (100mL) and 2M 5 NaOH aq (100mL). The organic phase was dried (Na2S0 ) and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as a pale brown foam (2.15g, quant). δH (CDCI3) 7.70 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.60-7.δ5 (1 H, m), 7.48- 7.32 (3H, m), 6.66 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.28-4.16 (1 H, br s), 3.70-3.48 (5H, m), 2.13-2.09 (1H, m), 1.92-1.81 (1H, m), 1.79-1.59 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 0 2.91 minutes, 467 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 57
3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenvπ-2-({(2 )-2-r(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy)methyllpyrrolidin-1-yl}carbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7iS0-one 5 3,4-Dihydro-2/-/-pyran (2.0mL, 22.4mmol) and p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (4δmg, δ mol %) were added to a solution of Intermediate δ6 (2.10g, 4.48mmol) in DCM (2δmL). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 48 h then diluted with DCM (δOmL) and washed with a mixture of Na23 aq (δOmL) and brine (δOmL). The organic phase was dried (Na2S0 ) and 0 concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 70% EtOAc in hexane) gave the title compound as a yellow solid (2.08g, 84%). δH (CDCI3) 7.69 (1 H, m), 7.60-7.δδ (1H, m), 7.δ0-7.32 (3H, m), 6.6δ (1 H, m), 4.δ0 (1H, br m), 4.29 (1H, br m), 3.70-3.31 (6H, m), 2.06-1.80 (4H, m), 1.69- 1.40 (6H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.61 minutes, δδ1 (M+H)+. δ
Intermediate 58
7-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenvhamino1~2-({(2 ?)-2- rftetrahvdro-2A -pyran-2-yloxy)methvπpyrrolidin-1- yl>carbonyl)thienof2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one 0 From Intermediate 57 and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline by the method of Intermediate 45. Yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.57 (1H, br s), 7.67-7.63 (1H, m), 7.δ4-7.40 (3H, m), 7.2δ (1 H, dd, J 1.0, 9.8Hz), 6.9δ-6.8δ (3H, m), 6.37 (1 H, dd, J 1.0, 9.8Hz), 4.δ6-4.δ0 (1 H, m), 4.48-4.43 (1 H, m), 3.84-3.40 (6H, m), 2.24 (3H, s), 2.02-1.46 (10H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.05 minutes, 596 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 59
7-f2-Chlorophenvn-3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(((2f?)-2-r(tetrahvdro-
2tf-pyran-2-yloxy)methvnpyrrolidin-1-yl>carbonyl)thienor2.3-b1pyridin-
6(7tf)-one
From Intermediate δ7 and 2,4-difluoroaniline by the method of Intermediate 4δ. Off-white solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.46-9.40 (1 H, m), 7.64-7.61 (1 H, m), 7.62- 7.39 (3H, m), 7.26 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 7.07-7.01 (1 H, m), 6.92-6.87 (1 H, m), 6.82-6.77 (1 H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.63-4.41 (2H, m), 3.81-3.37 (6H, m), 2.00-1.86 (3H, m), 1.82-1.67 (1 H, m), 1.66-1.32 (6H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.017 minutes, 622.1 (M+Na)+.
Intermediate 60
3-rf2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 28 (~4.20g) in 1 ,4-dioxane (10mL) was added 2M HCI(aq) (10mL) and the reaction mixture heated at 70°C for 1 h. The reaction was diluted with water (30mL), extracted with EtOAc (3 x 30mL) and the EtOAc extracts dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by chromatography on silica (0-δ% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (2.13g). δH (CDCI3) 7.94 (1 H, d, J 9.4Hz), 7.64-7.63 (3H, m), 7.46 (2H, m), 7.45 (1 H, m), 7.20 (1 H, m), 6.99 (1 H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J 9.4Hz), 6.74 (1 H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.64 minutes, 364.9 (M+H)+. Intermediate 61 tert-Butyl (2.4-difluorophenvn(6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7-dihydrothienor2.3- b1pyridin-3-yl)carbamate
Sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (6.0mL, 1.0M in THF, 6mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 60 (2.0g, 5.65mmoI) in THF (δOmL) at 0°C. After 30 min, di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (1.36g, 6.22mmol) was added and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and brine. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc (x 3), the combined organic extracts washed with brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 10% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound (1.2g, 47%). δH (CDCI3) 7.46 (1H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.43-7.30 (3H, m), 7.22-7.19 (2H, m), 7.08-7.03 (1 H, m), 6.76- 6.66 (2H, m), 6.49-6.46 (2H, m), 1.26 (9H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.79 minutes, 455 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 62 fert-Butyl (2,4-difluorophenyl)(2-{r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vnsulfonyl>-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-blpyridin-3- vDcarbamate n-Butyllithium (0.54mL of a 2.5M solution in hexanes, 1.35mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 61 (600mg, 1.32mmol) in THF (30mL) at -78°C. After 20 min, sulfur dioxide gas was bubbled through the solution for 5 min. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to r.t. and solvents were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in DCM (40mL) and N- chlorosuccinimide (210mg, 1.45mmol) was added. After 90 min at r.t. a solution of (R)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (146mg, 1.45mmol) in DCM (5mL) was added and the mixture stirred for a further 30 min. The mixture was diluted with DCM and washed with brine. The organic phase was dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 5% to 15% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound (340mg, 42%). δH (CDCI3) 7.40-7.34 (4H, m), 7.18-7.10 (3H, m), 6.74-6.67 (1 H, m), 6.65 -6.58 (1 H, m), 6.49 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.95 (1 H, br m), 3.92-3.24 (4H br m), 1.77- 1.58 (5H, br m), 1.27 (9H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.55 minutes, 618 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 63 Sodium 3-r(2-Chlorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7- dihvdrothienor2,3-blpyridine-2-carboxylate
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 15 (1.5g, 3.52mmol) and sodium hydroxide (150mg) following the procedure of Intermediate 30 to give the title compound as a solid (1.47g). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.97 (1 H, bs), 9.56 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.23-7.01 (2H, m), 7.26 (1 H, t, J 7.0Hz), 7.34 (1 H, d, J; 9.5Hz), 7.47-7.13 (3H, m), 7.72-7.64 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.42 minutes, 399 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 64 rac-fe/t-Butyl ri-((3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihvdrothienor2,3-b1pyridin-2-yl>carbonyl)pyrrolidin-3-vncarbamate
To a solution of Intermediate 35 (300mg, 0.53mmol) in DCM (5mL) was added tert-butyl pyrrolidin-3-ylcarbamate (300mg, 1.6mmol) and the reaction mixture stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the crude product purified by column chromatography (silica, 60% ethyl acetate in isohexane) to give the title compound as a yellow gum (277mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.53 (3H, m), 7.19 (2H, m), 7.17 (1 H, d, J 9.5Hz), 6.98 (1 H, m), 6.85 (1 H, m), 6.73 (1 H, m), 6.38 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.50 (1 H, bm), 3.76 (1 H, m), 3.61 (2H, m), 3.58 (1 H, m), 2.10 (1 H, m), 1.80 (1 H, m), 1.35 (9H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.50 minutes, 567 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 65 terf-Butyl r(3S)-1-({3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6 - dihvdrothienor2,3-blpyridin-2-yl>carbonyl)pyrrolidin-3-vncarbamate To a solution of Intermediate 35 (1g, 1.77mmol) in DCM (30mL) was added tert-butyl (S)-pyrrolidin-3-ylcarbamate (363mg, 1.95mmol) and the reaction mixture stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the crude product purified by column chromatography (silica, ethyl acetate) to give the title compound as a white solid (700mg). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.56 minutes, 567 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 66 ferf-Butyl r(3S)-1-({3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-
6,7-dihvdrothienor2.3-b1pyridin-2-yl carbonyl)pyrrolidin-3-vncarbamate
To a solution of Intermediate 34 (1.0g, 1.79mmol) in DCM (30mL) was added tert-butyl (S)-pyrrolidin-3-ylcarbamate (372mg, 2.0mmol) and the reaction mixture stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the crude product purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as an off white solid (1.2g). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.61 (1 H, bs), 7.65-7.55 (3H, m), 7.44-7.41 (2H, m), 7.25 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.99-6.85 (3H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.62 (1 H, m), 4.23 (1 H, m), 3.86-3.81 (1 H, m), 3.70-3.66 (2H, m), 3.47 (1 H, dd, J 10.3, 4.2Hz), 2.27 (3H, d, J 1.9Hz), 2.18-2.12 (1 H, m), 1.91-1.85 (1 H, m), 1.44 (9H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.64 minutes, 563 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 67
Pentafluorophenyl 3-r(2-cvanophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7- dihvdrothienof2,3-b1pyridine-2-carboxylate
A solution of LiOH monohydrate (390mg, 9.27mmol) in water (50mL) was added to a suspension of Intermediate 17 (3.5g, 8.42mmol) in THF (50mL) and EtOH (100mL) and the mixture heated to reflux for 5 h. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue co-evaporated with toluene (x 3) to give the intermediate lithium 3-[(2-cyanophenyl)amino]-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6,7- dihydrothieno[2,3-j ]pyridine-2-carboxylate as a brown solid. This solid was dissolved in DMF (100mL) and EDC (2.41 g, 12.6mmol) added. The reaction was stirred for 20 minutes at r.t. before adding pentafluorophenol (2.89g, 15.7mmol) and then stirred for a further 18 h. DMF was removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between DCM and water. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 30-100% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a solid (1.35g). LCMS (ES+) RT 4.06 minutes, 554 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 68
3-Bromo-7- 4-fluorophenyl)-6-oxo-6 -dihvdrothienor2,3-blpyridine-2- carbonyl chloride Thionyl chloride (5.2mL, 71 mmol) was added dropwise to a suspension of Intermediate 38 (5.2g, 14mmol) in toluene (150mL). The reaction was then heated at reflux for 3 h before allowing the reaction to cool to room temperature. The solvent and residual thionyl chloride were removed in vacuo and the resultant solid co-evaporated with toluene (x 3). This gave the title compound as an orange solid (4.9g) and was used without further purification. NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.77 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.29 (4H, m), 6.68 (2H, d, J 9.7Hz).
Intermediate 69 3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-fr(3R -3-hvdroχypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 68 (2.5g, 6.5mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.7mL, 9.7mmol) in DCM (100mL) was added (R)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (850mg, 9.7mmol) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was washed with water and brine, the DCM layer separated, dried (MgS04) and then concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as an orange solid (2.65g). LCMS RT 2.67 minutes, 439 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 70 3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-fr(3S)-3-hvdroχypyrrolidin-1- yl1carbonyl)thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one To a solution of Intermediate 68 (2.5g, 6.5mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (1.7mL, 9.7mmol) in DCM (100mL) was added (S)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (850mg, 9.7mmol) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was washed with water and brine, the DCM layer separated, dried (MgS04) and then concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound as an orange solid (2.84g). LCMS RT 2.67 minutes, 439 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 71
3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenvn-2-fr(3R)-3-(tetrahvdro-2tf-pyran-2- yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 / -one
To a solution of Intermediate 69 (2.65g, 6.0mmol) in DCM (80mL) was added p-toluenesulphonic acid (10mg, 0.06mmol) and 3,4-dihydro-2 -/-pyran (2.8mL, 30mmol) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was washed with sat. NaHC03(aq) (x 2), then brine, dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 80% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (2.40g). LCMS RT 3.28 minutes, 523 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 72 3-Bromo-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(r(3S)-3-(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 70 (2.65g, 6.0mmol) in DCM (80mL) was added p-toluenesulphonic acid (10mg, 0.06mmol) and 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (2.8mL, 30mmol) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was washed with sat. NaHC03(aq) (x 2), then brine, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 80% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (2.74g). LCMS RT 3.28 minutes, 523 (M+H)+. Intermediate 73
3-r 2.4-Difluorophenvπamino1-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(r(3ffl-3-(tetrahvdro- 2H-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1"vncarbonyl>thienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)- one To a de-gassed solution of Intermediate 71 (1.2g, 2.30mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (210mg, 0.23mmol) and (+/-)- BINAP (290mg, 0.46mmol) in toluene (15mL) was added 2,4-difluoroaniline (281 μL, 2.76mmol) and caesium carbonate (1.0g, 3.22mmol). The reaction was heated at 110°C under nitrogen for two days. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80mL), washed with water, brine (x 2), dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 50% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a brown solid (876mg). LCMS RT 3.76 minutes, 570 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 74
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-7-(4-fluorophenvπ-2-(r(3S)-3-(tetrahvdro-
2H-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl'l-thienof2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )- one
To a de-gassed solution of Intermediate 72 (1.37g, 2.63mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (120mg, 0.13mmol) and (+/-)-
BINAP (160mg, 0.26mmol) in toluene (15mL) was added 2,4-difluoroaniline
(321 μL, 3.16mmol) and caesium carbonate (1.20g, 3.68mmol). The reaction was heated at 110°C under nitrogen for 18 h. Additional equivalents of
Pd2(dba)3 (60mg, 0.065mmol) and (+/-)-BINAP (80mg, 0.13mmol) were added and the reaction heated at reflux for a further 2 days. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80mL), washed with water, brine (x 2), dried
(MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 50% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a brown solid (767mg). LCMS RT 3.74 minutes, 570 (M+H)+. Intermediate 75
3-r 4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-7- 4-fluorophenvπ-2-fr(3S)-3- (tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3- blpyridin-6(7fl)-one To a de-gassed solution of Intermediate 72 (1.37g, 2.63mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (120mg, 0.13mmol) and (+/-)- BINAP (160mg, 0.26mmol) in toluene (15mL) was added 4-fluoro-3- methylaniline (400mg, 3.16mmol) and caesium carbonate (1.20g, 3.68mmol). The reaction was heated at 110°C under nitrogen for 18 h. Additional equivalents of Pd2(dba)3 (60mg, 0.065mmol) and (+/-)-BINAP (80mg, 0.13mmol) were added and the reaction heated at reflux for a further 2 days. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80mL), washed with water, brine (x 2), dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 50% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a brown solid (980mg). LCMS RT 3.84 minutes, 566 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 76
3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenvπ-2-(r(3S)-3-hvdroχypyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7ffl-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 55 and (S)-3- hydroxypyrrolidine following the method of Intermediate 56.
Intermediate 77 S-Bromo^^-chlorophenvπ^-frOSI-S-ftetrahvdro^H-pyran^- yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl thienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 76 and 3,4-dihydro-2H- pyran following the method of Intermediate 57. NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.77 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.66-7.61 (1 H, m), 7.54-7.41 (3H, m), 6.73 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.69- 4.53 (1 H, m), 4.45-4.43 (1 H, m), 3.86-3.49 (6H, m), 2.17-2.14 (2H, m), 1.87- 1.69 (2H, m), 1.55-1.40 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.45 minutes, 539 (M+H)+. Intermediate 78
7-f2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-fr(3S)-3- (tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl1carbonyl}thienor2,3- b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 77 (883mg, 1.64mmol) and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline (267mg, 2.13mmol) following the method of Intermediate 75. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 10% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (623mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.70 (1 H, s), 7.68-7.64 (1 H, m), 7.55-7.41 (3H, m), 7.27-7.24 (1 H, m), 6.96-6.85 (3H, m), 6.37 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.65-4.63 (1 H, m), 4.42-4.40 (1 H, m), 3.84-3.64 (5H, m), 3.51-3.47 (1 H, m), 2.24 (3H, s), 2.16-2.01 (1 H, m), 1.99-1.92 (1 H, m), 1.80-1.70 (1 H, m), 1.68-1.67 (1 H, m), 1.56-1.49 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.94 minutes, 582 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 79
7-(2-Chlorophenvπ-3-r(3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-(r(3S)-3-(tetrahvdro-2Ay- Pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonylUhienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H -one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 77 (883mg, 1.64mmol) and m-toluidine (0.28mL, 2.62mmol) following the method of Intermediate 75. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 10% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (509mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.65 (1 H, m), 7.68-7.65 (3H, m), 7.39 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.11 (1 H, t, J 7.5Hz), 6.90-6.84 (3H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.63-4.60 (1 H, m), 4.40-4.38 (1 H, m), 3.81-3.67 (5H, m), 3.65-3.63 (1 H, m), 2.31 (3H, s), 2.17- 1.57 (5H, m), 1.53 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.91 minutes, 564 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 80
7-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3S)-3-(tetrahvdro- 2fy-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7ti)- one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 77 (883mg, 1.64mmol) and 2,4-difluoroaniline (0.28mL, 2.75mmol) following the method of Intermediate 75. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 10% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a brown solid (750mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.66 (1 H, d, J 4.4Hz), 7.68-7.64 (1 H, m), 7.56- 7.41 (3H, m), 7.27 (1 H, d, J 8.8Hz), 7.07-7.04 (1 H, m), 6.94-6.89 (1 H, m), 6.84-6.80 (1 H, m), 6.42 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.65-4.63 (1 H, m), 4.40-4.38 (1 H, m), 3.86-3.61 (5H, m), 3.51-3.44 (1 H, m), 2.07-1.89 (2H, m), 1.79-1.77 (1 H, m), 1.71-1.68 (1 H, m), 1.59-1.49 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.83 minutes, 586 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 81
3-Bromo-7-(4-methylphenyl)-2-fr(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- yl1carbonyl}thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7fy)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 37 and (S)-3- hydroxypyrrolidine following the method of Intermediate 56. NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.66 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.30 (2H, d, J 8.1 Hz), 7.18 (2H, d, J 8.1 Hz), 6.65 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.44 (1 H, bm), 3.80-3.25 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.20-1.93 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.65 minutes, 433 (M+H, 79Br)+, 435 (M+H, 81Br)+.
Intermediate 82
3-Bromo-7-(4-methylphenyl)-2-(r(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl thienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 37 (6.0g, 1 δ.Ommol) and (r?)-3-hydroxypyrroIidine (2.0g, 27.0mmol) following the method of Intermediate 56. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% THF in DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid (5.36g). δH 7.68 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.32 (2H, m), 7.20 (2H, m), 6.66 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.49 (1 H, bs), 3.78-3.60 (3H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 1.97 (2H, bs), 1.82 (2H, bs). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.64 minutes, 433 (M+H, 79Br)+, 435 (M+H, 81Br)+. Intermediate 83
3-Bromo-7-phenyl-2-f(3-hvdroxyazetidin-1-vπcarbonvn-7 -thienor2,3- blpyridin-6-one
Intermediate 36 (17.6g, δOmmol) was suspended in DCM (150mL) to which 5 thionyl chloride (30mL, 411 mmol) and DMF (O.δmL) were added. The mixture was heated under reflux for 1 h during which the solid dissolved to form a dark solution. After cooling to ambient temperature, the solution was evaporated to dryness in vacuo (30°C/1δ0mBar). This step was repeated twice with fresh DCM (2 x 100mL). The intermediate acid chloride was thus 0 obtained as a mottled brown solid.
In a separate flask, 3-hydroxyazetidine hydrochloride (10.9g, lOOmmol) and diisopropylethylamine (δOmL, 360mmol) were stirred at 20-25°C in 1 :1 DCM:DMF (400mL) for 1 h then cooled to 0-5°C. A solution of the acid δ chloride (19.9g) in DCM (200mL) was added to this preparation over 1 h and the resulting orange-brown solution stirred out for another hour. Following evaporation to dryness (6-100mBar/40°C), the residue was partitioned between EtOAc (δOOmL) and water (1δ0mL) at 40°C. The organic phase was washed twice with water (2 x 100mL) then re-evaporated. The residue 0 was re-suspended in fresh EtOAc (200mL) at 40°C and then filtered. The title compound was obtained as a fawn powder after washing with EtOAc (3 x 30mL) and drying in vacuo at 60°C (16.δg, 81.6% yield, m.p. 199.1°C). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.87 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 7.65 (3H, m), 7.55 (2H, m), 6.69 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 5.62 (1 H, d, J 6.5Hz), 4.46 (1 H, m), 4.30 (2H, m), 3.87 (2H, br m). 5 LCMS (ES+) RT 2.19 minutes, 405 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 84
3-Bromo-7-phenyl-2-r3-(tetrahvdropyran-2-yloxy)-azetidine-1-carbonvn-
7tif-thieno|'2,3-b'|pyridin-6-one 0 p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.28g, 1.47mmol) was added to a suspension of Intermediate 83 (11.9g, 29mmol) in DCM (100mL) containing 3,4-dihydro-2/- -pyran (7.5g, 89mmol). The mixture was stirred until all the starting material had dissolved to give an orange solution and then left to stand at 20-25°C overnight. Sat. NaHC03(aq) (20mL) was added to quench the reaction and the organic phase washed subsequently with water (25mL). After drying (Na2S04) and removal of solvent in vacuo the crude product was obtained as a brown glass (22.8g). This residue was taken up in EtOAc (100mL) at 40°C, and then seeded after the resulting solution had cooled to 25°C. Once crystallisation had initiated the temperature was reduced further to 0-5°C and the slurry stirred out for 1 h. The fawn solid was filtered off, washed with EtOAc (2 x 25mL) and dried at 40°C in vacuo, affording the title compound (14.1g, 71.2% yield, m.p. 162°C). δH (CDCI3) 7.78 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 7.67 (3H, m), 7.48 (2H, m), 6.73 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.70 (1 H, m), 4.68 (1 H, m), 4.40 (2H, dd), 4.19 (2H, m), 3.81 (1 H, m), 3.50 (1 H, m), 1.42-1.90 (6H, br m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.31 minutes, 489 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 85
3-(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenylamino)-7-phenyl-2-r3-(tetrahvdropyan-2- yloxy)azetidine-1-carbonvn-7f/-thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6-one
Intermediate 84 (2.00g, 4.21 mmol), 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline (0.58g, 4.64mmol), rac-BINAP (0.26g, 0.42mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (0.19g, 0.21 mmol) cesium carbonate (2.01 g, 6.17mmol) and toluene (20mL) were charged to an oven-dried flask and heated to reflux for 2h under an atmosphere of nitrogen.
After cooling to r.t. water (20mL) was added and this mixture stirred for
10min. At this time the solid was isolated via filtration, washed with toluene (2 x 5mL) and water (2 x 5mL) and dried in vacuo to yield the title compound
(1.89g, 84%). δH (CDCI3) 9.62 (1 H, s), 7.53-7.64 (3H, m), 7.38-7.41 (2H, m),
7.16-7.20 (1 H, d), 6.87-6.98 (3H, m), 6.36-6.39 (1 H, d), 4.51-4.60 (2H, m),
4.32-4.49 (2H, m), 4.04-4.16 (2H, m), 3.78-3.85 (1 H, m), 3.47-3.51 (1 H, m),
2.25 (3H, s), 1.51-1.81 (6H, m). LCMS (ES+), RT 4.19 minutes, 534 (M+H)+. Intermediate 86 ferf-Butyl ri-((3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7- dihvdrothienor2,3-b]pyridin-2-yl)carbonyl)piperidin-4-yllcarbamate
A mixture of Intermediate 35 (800mg, 1.42mmol), Et3N (0.5mL) and tert-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate (354mg, 1.70mmol) in DCM (20mL) was stirred at r.t for 18 h. The reaction was concentrated under vacuum and triturated with Et20. Purification by chromatography (silica, 2% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound as an off-white solid (267 mg, 32%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.40 (1 H, s), 7.87 (1 H, d, J 9.6 Hz), 7.7-7.6 (3H, m), 7.57-7.53 (2H, m), 7.33-7.26 (1 H, m), 6.98-6.9 (2H, m), 6.86-6.83 (1 H, m), 6.57 (1 H, d, J 9.6 Hz), 3.85- 3.80 (2H, m), 3.40-3.30 (1 H, m), 2.55-2.50 (2H, m), 1.65-1.60 (2H, m), 1.38 (9H, s), 1.18-1.14 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.50 minutes, 581 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 87 ferf-Butyl ri-f(3-r(2,4-difluorophenvπamino1-6-oxo-7-phenyl-6.7- dihvdrothienor2.3-b1pyridin-2-yl}carbonyl)azetidin-3-vncarbamate
A mixture of Intermediate 35 (483mg, 0.85mmol), Et3N (O.δmL) and tert-butyl azetidin-3-ylcarbamate (175mg, 1.02mmol) in DCM (20mL) was stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum and triturated with Et20. The title compound was obtained as a yellow solid (386mg, 82%). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.32 (1 H, s), 7.71-7.62 (3H, m), 7.57-7.50 (2H, m), 7.45-7.38 (1 H, m), 7.36 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 7.17-7.10 (1 H, m), 7.09-7.00 (1 H, m), 6.47 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 4.60-4.30 (3H, m), 3.90-3.80 (2H, m), 3.35-3.30 (1 H, m), 1.40 (9H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.58 minutes, 553 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 88
3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenvπ-2-(r(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one
From Intermediate 55 (4.7g, 12.2mmol) and (R)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (1.13g, 13mmol) by the method of Intermediate 56 to give the title compound as a yellow solid (5.70g, quant). δH (CDCI3) 7.77 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.63-7.60 (1 H, m), 7.51-7.37 (3H, m), 6.70 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.51 (1 H, br m), 3.78-3.53 (4H, m), 2.20-1.70 (2H, m), 1.60 (1 H, br s). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.70 minutes, 453 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 89
3-Bromo-7-(2-chlorophenyl)-2-fr(3 ?)-3-(tetrahvdro-2H-pyran-2- yloxy')Pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7 /)-one
From Intermediate 88 (5.35g, 11.8mmol) and 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (3.3mL, 35.4mmol) by the method of Intermediate 57 to give the title compound as an orange solid (6.70g, quant). δH (DMSO-d6) 7.91-7.60 (5H, m), 6.70 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.85-4.83 (1 H, m), 4.78-4.67 (1 H, m), 4.34-4.27 (1 H, m), 3.93-3.40 (5H, m), 2.10-1.95 (2H, m), 1.85-1.40 (6H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.46 minutes, 537 (M+H)+.
Intermediate 90
7-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-rf2.4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(r 3/?)-3-(tetrahvdro-
2tf-pyran-2-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)- one
From Intermediate 89 (6.35g, 11.8mmol) and 2,4-difluoroaniline (1.45mL, 14.1 mmol) by the method of Intermediate 75 to give the title compound as a pale brown solid (3.0g, 43%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.99-8.94 (1 H, m), 7.83-7.79
(1 H, m), 7.74-7.59 (4H, m), 7.39-7.26 (1 H, m), 7.06-6.93 (2H, m), 6.51 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.62-4.54 (1 H, m), 4.23-4.18 (1 H, m), 3.73-3.50 (6H, m), 1.95-
1.35 (8H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.85 minutes, 586 (M+H)+.
Example 1
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthSenor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
To a suspension of Intermediate 45 (7.3g, 12.9mmol) in ethanol (300mL) was added 10% HCI(aq) (40mL) and the reaction stirred at room temperature for
16h. The reaction mixture was then concentrated in vacuo to give an orange/brown oil. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, EtOAc) followed by a second column (silica, 10% THF in DCM) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (4.05g). δH (CDCI3) 9.36 (1 H, bs), 7.68-7.36 (3H, m), 7.33-7.18 (2H, m), 7.14-7.06 (1 H, m), 7.04-7.00 (1 H, m), 6.97-6.73 (2H, m), 6.35 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.36-4.28 (1 H, m), 3.74-3.47 (4H, m), 2.00-1.68 (3H, m), 1.60-1.50 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.19 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 2 2-fr(2R)-2-(Hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-3-r(3- methylphenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 46 (2.0g, 3.68mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (747mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.77 (3H, m), 7.71 (2H, m), 7.51 (1 H, d, J 9.73Hz), 7.36 (1 H, m), 7.07 (3H, m), 6.58 (1 H, d, J 9.75Hz), 4.57 (1 H, m), 4.00-3.75 (4H, m), 2.51 (3H, s), 2.25-2.00 (3H, m), 1.81 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.18 minutes, 460 (M+H)+.
Example 3 3-r(3-Chlorophenvπamino1-2-fr(2 ?)-2-fhvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from intermediate 47 (0.85g, 1.5mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (545mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.60 (3H, m), 7.55 (3H, m), 7.37 (1 H, m), 7.03 (2H, m), 6.95 (1 H, m), 6.49 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.38 (1 H, m), 3.80 (1 H, m), 3.76 (1 H, m), 3.62 (2H, m), 2.18 (1 H, s), 1.96 (3H, m), 1.66 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.15 minutes, 480 (M+H)+.
Example 4 3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(r(2/?)-2-(hvdroxymethvπpyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-7-(4-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 48 (1.14g, 2.0mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (470mg, 46%). δH (CDCI3) 7.31-7.29 (2H, m), 7.19-7.13 (3H, m), 6.95-6.84 (1 H, m), 6.83-6.80 (1 H, m), 6.74 (1 H, t, J 7.7Hz), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.31-4.25 (1 H, ), 3.72-3.48 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 1.96-1.73 (3H, m), 1.62-1.51 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.24 minutes, 496 (M+H)+.
Example 5
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl')amino1-2-fr(2 ?)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)- pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -7-f4-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )- one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 49 (879mg, 1.52mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (410mg, 54%). δH (CDCI3) 9.35 (1 H, bs), 7.30 (2H, m), 7.21- 7.12 (3H, m), 6.86-6.75 (3H, m), 6.29 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.30-4.25 (2H, m), 3.72-3.70 (1H, m), 3.69-3.63 (1H, m), 3.62-3.49 (2H, m), 2.174 (3H, s), 2.170 (3H, s), 1.96-1.74 (3H, m), 1.58-1.50 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.30 minutes, 492 (M+H)+.
Example 6
2-{f(2R')-2-(Hvdroxymethyl')pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7-(4-methylphenyl)- 3-r(3-methylphenyl)amino hienor2,3-b1pyridin-6f7tf)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 50 (1.0g, 1.8mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a yellow solid (492mg, 56%). δH (CDCI3) 9.20 (1 H, bs), 7.31-7.18 (5H, m), 7.09 (1 H, t, J 8.0 Hz), 6.80-6.75 (3H, m), 6.30 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.29-4.19 (2H, m), 3.71- 3.67 (1 H, m), 3.65-3.59 (1 H, m), 3.52-3.46 (2H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.23 (3H, s), 1.96-1.73 (3H, m), 1.69-1.56 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.27 minutes, 474 (M+H)+. Example 7
3-r(2.4-Difluorophenvπamino1-7-f4-fluorophenvn-2-π(2ffl-2-
(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonylMhienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 51 (206mg, 0.35mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as an off-white solid (155mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.92 (1 H, s), 7.92 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.79 (2H, m), 7.66 (2H, t, J 8.6Hz), 7.51-7.46 (1 H, m), 7.20-7.10 (2H, m), 6.68 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.82 (1 H, m), 4.10 (1 H, bs), 3.54 (1 H, m), 3.44 (1 H, m), 3.11 (1 H, m), 1.98-1.87 (3H, m), 1.80 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.15 minutes, 500 (M+H)+.
Example 8
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-7-(4-fluorophenvn-2-fr(2ffl-2- (hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 52 (90mg, 0.16mmol) following the method of Example 1 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (63mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.80 (1 H, s), 7.81 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 7.66 (2H, m), 7.52 (2H, t, J 8.5Hz), 7.05 (1 H, t, J 9.1 Hz), 6.87-6.85 (1 H, m), 6.82- 6.78 (1 H, m), 6.56 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.67 (1 H, t, J 5.5Hz), 3.96 (1 H, m), 3.36- 3.32 (2H, m), 2.87 (1 H, m), 2.20 (3H, s), 1.72-1.69 (3H, m), 1.63-1.58 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.22 minutes, 496 (M+H)+.
Example 9
7-(2-Chlorophenvn-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl')amino1-2-fr(2/?)-2-
(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7A )-one 1 M HCl aq (2mL) was added to a solution of Intermediate 58 (500mg, 0.84mmol) in EtOH (20mL) and the mixture stirred at r.t. overnight. Saturated Na2C03 aq (50mL) was added and the mixture extracted with EtOAc (50ml then 10mL). The combined organics were dried (Na2S04) and concentrated in vacuo. The residual gum was treated with DCM (5mL) and then the solvent removed in vacuo to give the title compound as a yellow solid (400mg, 93%). δH (CDCI3) 9.47 (1 H, br d, J 7.7Hz), 7.60-7.56 (1 H, m), 7.49-7.33 (3H, m), 7.18 (1 H, dd, J 0.5, 9.8Hz), 6.89-6.79 (3H, m), 6.30 (1 H, dd, J 0.5, 9.8Hz), 4.33-4.31 (1 H, m), 4.29 (1 H, br s), 3.74-3.37 (4H, m), 2.19 (3H, d, J 1.5Hz), 1.99-1.64 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.28 minutes, 512 (M+H)+.
Example 10
7-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2ffl-2- (hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )-one From Intermediate 59 by the method of Example 9. Brown solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.40 (1 H, s), 7.65-7.62 (1 H, m), 7.53-7.39 (3H, m), 7.24 (1 H, d, J 9.9Hz), 7.10-7.04 (1 H, m), 6.84-6.80 (1 H, m), 6.41 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.40-4.34 (1 H, m), 4.17-4.18 (1 H, m), 3.79-3.54 (4H, m), 1.98-1.75 (3H, m), 1.55-1.50 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.247 minutes, 516 (M+H)+.
Example 11
3-r(2-Chlorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2/:?)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-7-phenylthienoF2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 y)-one
To a suspension of Intermediate 63 (1.0g, 2.4mmol) in DCM (15mL) was added EDC (0.73g, 3.7mmol, 1.5equiv.), HOBT (0.33g, 3.7mmol, 1.5equiv.) and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 15 minutes. (R)-2-Pyrrolidinemethanol (0.25mL, 3.7mmol) was added and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with DCM (10mL), washed with water (10mL) and brine (10mL), dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as an off-white solid (492mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.00 (1 H, bs), 7.77-7.68 (7H, m), 7.38 (1 H, m), 7.07 (2H, m), 6.64 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.78 (1 H, t, J 5.9Hz), 4.22-4.15 (1 H, m), 3.55-3.53 (2H, m), 3.46-3.39 (1 H, m), 3.26-3.18 (1 H, m), 1.99-1.77 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.28 minutes, (Cl37) 482 (M+H)+. General procedure for preparing amide Examples by EDC coupling
The following Examples were all prepared from the appropriate carboxylic acid intermediate and amine starting materials following the method described for Example 11.
Example 12
3-r(2-Chlorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2S'l-2-fhvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl'y-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 63 (500mg, 1.24mmol) and (S)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.12mL, 1.86mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as an off-white solid (40mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.57-7.42 (3H, m), 7.39-7.29 (4H, m), 7.14-7.05 (1 H, m), 6.95-6.84 (2H, m), 6.39 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.32-4.24 (1 H, m), 3.70-3.58 (2H, m), 3.52- 3.38 (2H, m), 1.97-1.49 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.27 minutes, (Cl37) 482 (M+H)+.
Example 13
3-Anilino-2-(r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7- phenylthienof2,3-blpyridin-6(7tf)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 29 and (R)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 7.56-7.47 (3H, m), 7.36-7.33 (2H, m), 7.27-7.19 (3H, m), 7.02-6.99 (3H, m), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.34- 4.29 (1 H, m), 3.73-3.69 (1 H, m), 3.65-3.62 (1 H, m), 3.57-3.48 (2H, m), 2.06- 1.70 (3H, m), 1.60-1.45 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.10 minutes, 446 (M+H)+.
Example 14
3-Anilino-2-fr(2S)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yllcarbonyl -7- phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 29 and (S)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.31 (1 H, bs), 7.55-7.46 (3H, m), 7.35-7.32 (2H, m), 7.26-7.18 (3H, m), 7.01-6.98 (3H, m), 6.33 (1 H, d, J
9.7Hz), 4.32-4.29 (1H, m), 4.14 (1 H, bs), 3.73-3.64 (2H, m), 3.61-3.50 (2H,
- m), 1.97-1.71 (3H, m), 1.58-1.50 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.11 minutes, 446 (M+H)+.
Example 15
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2S)-2-(hvdroxymethvπpyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl -7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 28 (1.0g, 2.58mmol) and (S)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (390mg, 3.87mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (300mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.65-7.48 (3H, m), 7.35-7.32 (2H, m), 7.15 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.04- 7.01 (1 H, m), 6.99-6.72 (2H, m), 6.36 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.37-4.29 (1 H, m), 3.74-3.47 (4H, m), 1.95-1.74 (3H, m), 1.61-1.53 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.18 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 18
3-Anilino-2-fr(2S)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7- phenylthienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 29 and (S)-2- (methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.50 (1 H, bs), 7.55-7.46 (3H, m), 7.40-7.30 (2H, m), 7.27 (1 H, d, J ι9.7Hz), 7.25-7.18 (2H, m), 6.99- 6.95 (3H, m), 6.33 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.35-4.30 (1 H, m), 3.62-3.56 (1 H, m), 3.51-3.43 (2H, m), 3.41-3.30 (1 H, m), 3.23 (3H, s), 1.92-1.73 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.49 minutes, 460 (M+H)+.
Example 19 3-Anilino-2-fr(2ffl-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl -7- phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 29 and (R)-2- (methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid. δH (CDCI3) 9.45 (1 H, bs), 7.55-7.46 (3H, m), 7.40-7.30 (2H, m), 7.27 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.25-7.18 (2H, m), 6.99- 6.95 (3H, m), 6.33 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.35-4.30 (1 H, m), 3.62-3.56 (1 H, m), 3.51-3.43 (2H, m), 3.41-3.30 (1 H, m), 3.23 (3H, s), 1.92-1.73 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.49 minutes, 460 (M+H)+.
Example 20 7-(4-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-fr(2ffl-2-
(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 30 (800mg, 1.87mmol) and (r?)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.2δmL, 2.δ1 mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (251 mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.43 (1 H, bs), 7.51-7.48 (2H, m), 7.39-7.19 (2H, m), 7.13 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 6.80-6.76 (3H, m), 6.28 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.36-4.25 (2H, m), 3.75- 3.50 (4H, m), 2.18 (3H, s), 1.98-1.73 (3H, m), 1.60-1.52 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.39 minutes, 512 (M+H)+.
Example 21
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-2-π(2S)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)-
PVrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl}-7-(3-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6f7tf - one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 31 (1.0g, 2.4mmol) and (S)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.36mL, 3.6mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (212mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.38 (1 H, bs), 7.45-7.40 (1 H, m), 7.38-7.27 (1 H, m), 7.18-7.12 (3H, m), 6.87-6.76 (3H, m), 6.30 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.36-4.23 (2H, m), 3.75-3.43 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.18 (3H, s), 1.97-1.82 (3H, m), 1.70-1.59 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.34 minutes, 492 (M+H)+. Example 22
2- r(2 ?)-2-fHvdroxymethvπpyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7-(3-methylphenvπ-
3-r(3-methylphenvπamino1thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 ^-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 32 (842mg, 2.15mmol) and (R)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.32mL, 3.23mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (179mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.21 (1 H, bs), 7.40-7.35 (1 H, m), 7.27-7.24 (2H, m), 7.18-7.07 (3H, m), 6.81-6.76 (3H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.30-4.22 (2H, m), 3.70-3.46 (4H, m), 2.37 (3H, s), 2.25 (3H, s), 1.98-1.66 (3H, m), 1.58-1.47 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.30 minutes, 474 (M+H)+.
Example 23
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-2-(r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)- pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-7-(3-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)- one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 31 (640mg, 1.54mmol) and (R)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.25mL, 2.3mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (112mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.49-7.35 (1 H, m), 7.26 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.24-7.23 (3H, m), 6.98- 6.91 (3H, m), 6.88 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.39-4.35 (1 H, m), 3.83-3.56 (4H, m), 2.45 (3H, s), 2.26 (3H, s), 1.99-1.81 (3H, m), 1.68-1.60 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.34 minutes, 492 (M+H)+.
Example 24 3-r 3-Chloro-4-fluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2ffl-2-(hvdroxymethyl)- Pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 33 (340mg, 0.77mmol) and (r?)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.12mL, 1.16mmol) following the method of
Example 11 to give the title compound as a yellow solid (71 mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.58-7.51 (3H, m), 7.34-7.21 (2H, m), 7.19-7.17 (1 H, m), 7.05-6.98 (2H, m), 6.88-6.82 (1 H, m), 6.38 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.34-4.30 (1 H, m), 3.72-3.48 (4H, m), 1.99-1.53 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.21 minutes, 498 (M+H)+.
Example 25 3-r(3-Chloro-4-fluorophenvnamino1-2-fr(2S)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)- Pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 33 (340mg, 0.77mmol) and (S)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.12mL, 1.16mmol) following the method of Example 11 to give the title compound as a yellow solid (65mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.66-7.59 (3H, m), 7.44-7.31 (2H, m), 7.28-7.26 (1 H, m), 7.14-7.08 (2H, m), 6.98-6.93 (1 H, m), 6.47 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.43-4.40 (1 H, m), 3.81-3.57 (4H, m), 2.06-1.62 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.21 minutes, 498 (M+H)+.
Example 26 3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-(r(2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)- pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H -one
(R)-2-Pyrrolidinemethanol (0.398mL, 4.037mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 34 (1.5g, 2.69mmol) in DCM (20mL) and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 24 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography (silica, 1-10% THF in DCM) to produce the title compound as an orange solid (0.737g). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.45 (1 H, s), 7.65-7.55 (4H, br m), 7.49-7.46 (2H, m), 6.98-6.93 (1 H, m), 6.88-6.86 (1 H, m), 6.80-6.76 (1 H, m), 6.42 (1 H, d, J 9.63 Hz), 4.06 (1 H, m), 3.45-3.36 (3H, m), 3.21-3.17 (2H, m), 2.08 (3H, s), 1.85-1.74 (3H, m), 1.68-1.60 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) 478 (M+H)+. HPLC Chiralpak AS 80:20 Isohexane/EtOH. RT 19.62 minutes.
Example 27
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-fr(2S)-2-fhvdroxymethyl)- pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one (S)-2-Pyrrolidinemethanol (0.198mL, 2.007mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 34 (0.750g, 1.338mmol) in DCM (10mL) and the mixture stirred at r.t. for 24 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by column chromatography (silica, 1-10% THF in DCM) to produce the title compound as an orange solid (0.369α ). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.46 (1 H, s), 7.65-7.55 (4H, br m), 7.49-7.46 (2H, m), 6.98-6.93 (1 H, m), 6.88-6.86 (1 H, m), 6.80-6.76 (1 H, m), 6.42 (1 H, d, J 9.63 Hz), 4.05 (1 H, m), 3.46-3.35 (3H, m), 3.20-3.16 (2H, m), 2.19 (3H, s), 1.84-1.72 (3H, m), 1.68-1.60 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) 478 (M+H)+. HPLC Chiralpak AS 80:20 Isohexane/EtOH. RT 15.37 minutes.
Example 28
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenvπamino1-2-fr(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl)-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one (S)-3-Hydroxypyrrolidine (107mg, 1.23mmol) was added to a solution of Intermediate 35 (400mg, 0.709mmol) in DCM (8mL) and the reaction stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the crude residue purified by column chromatography (silica, 5-15% THF in DCM) and (silica, 20-80% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (156mg). δH (CDCI3) 7.46-7.53 (3H, m), 7.33 (2H, m), 7.19 (1 H, d, J 10.2Hz), 6.95-7.01 (1 H, m), 6.82-6.87 (1 H, m), 6.72-6.76 (1 H, m), 6.35-6.38 (1 H, m), 4.22 (1 H, m), 3.64-3.69 (2H, m), 3.62 (1 H, m), 3.55 (1 H, m), 1.89-1.94 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.98 minutes, 468 (M+H)+.
Example 29
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
(R)-3-Hydroxypyrrolidine (107mg, 1.23mmol) was added to a solution of
Intermediate 35 (232mg, 0.411 mmol) in DCM (4mL) and the reaction stirred at room temperature for 24 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the crude residue purified by column chromatography (silica, 5-15% THF in DCM) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (91 mg). δH (CDCI3)
7.48 (3H, m), 7.31 (2H, m), 7.15 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.95 (1 H, m), 6.82 (1 H, m),
6.72 (1 H, m), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.41 (1 H, m), 3.67-3.59 (3H, m), 3.53
(1 H, m), 1.90 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.95 minutes, 468 (M+H)+.
Example 30
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-2-frf3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from (S)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (100mg, 1.10mmol) and Intermediate 34 (200mg, 0.36mmol) following the method of
Example 28 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (55mg). δH
(CDCI3) 7.51 (3H, m), 7.34 (2H, m), 7.19 (1 H, m), 6.84 (2H, m), 6.80 (1 H, m),
6.33 (1 H, d, J 9.75Hz), 4.44 (1 H, m), 3.66 (4H, m), 2.18 (3H, s), 1.91 (2H, m).
LCMS (ES+) RT 3.02 minutes, 464 (M+H)+.
Example 31
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-fr(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-frlpyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from (R)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (100mg, 1.10mmol) and Intermediate 34 (200mg, 0.36mmol) following the method of
Example 28 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (73mg). δH
(CDCI3) 7.65 (3H, m), 7.60 (2H, m), 7.29 (1 H, m), 6.90 (3H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J
9.73Hz), 4.58 (1 H,m), 3.80 (3H, m), 3.76 (1 H, m), 2.31 (3H, s), 2.07 (2H, m).
LCMS (ES+) RT 3.02 minutes, 464 (M+H)+.
Example 32
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3S,4S)-3,4-dihvdroχypyrrolidin-1- yl1carbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-fo1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from (S,S)-3,4-dihydroxypyrrolidine (110mg, 1.10mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (144mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.49 (1 H, s), 7.51 (3H, m), 7.34 (2H, m),' 7.18 (1 H, m), 6.93 (1 H, m), 6.84 (1 H, m), 6.82 (1 H, m), 6.36 (1 H, d, J 9.72Hz), 4.15 (2H, m), 3.83 (2H, m), 3.57 (2H, d, J 12.4Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.74 minutes, 484 (M+H)+.
Example 33
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-rf3-hvdroxyazetidin-1-yl)carbonyll-7- phenylthienor2,3-b1pyr8din-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from 3-hydroxyazetidine hydrochloride (110mg, 1.05mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) with the addition of diisopropylethylamine (0.195mL, 1.12mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as a white solid (64mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.48 (1 H, s), 7.53 (3H, m), 7.32 (2H, m), 7.10 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.86 (1 H,ττι), 6.83 (1 H, m), 6.74 (1 H, m), 6.33 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.58 (1 H, s), 4.34 (2H, m), 3.94 (2H, m), 2.07 (1 H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.06 minutes, 454 (M+H)+.
Example 34
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-f r(2S)-2-(1 -hvdroxy-1 - methylethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl)-7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin- 6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from 2-[(2S)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]propan-2-ol (140mg, 1.05mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (140mg). δH (CDCI3) 8.95 (1 H, s), 7.51 (3H, m), 7.49 (2H, m), 7.19 (1 H, m), 6.87 (1 H, m), 6.84 (1 H, m), 6.76 (1 H, m), 6.37 (i H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.36 (1 H, m), 3.90 (1 H, m), 3.34 (1 H, m), 1.93 (1 H, m), 1.84 (1 H, m), 1.67 (2H, m), 1.13 (3H, s), 1.00 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.47 minutes, 510 (M+H)+. Example 35
3-r(2.4-DifluorophenvDamino1-2-{ 2R)-2-(1 -hvdroxy-1 - methylethvπpyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyll-7-phenylthienor2.3-b1pyridin-
6(7H)-one The title compound was prepared from 2-[(2f?)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]propan-2-ol hydrochloride (165mg, 1.05mmol) and Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.35mmol) with the addition of diisopropylethylamine (0.20mL, 1.12mmol) following the method of Example 28 to give the title compound as an off-white solid (89mg). δH (CDCI3) 8.96 (1 H, s), 7.63 (3H, m), 7.32 (2H, m), 7.23 (1 H, m), 7.01 (1 H, m), 6.83 (1 H, m), 6.74 (1 H, m), 6.38 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 5.00 (1 H, s), 4.32 (1 H, m), 3.90 (1 H, m), 3.33 (1 H, m), 2.00 (2H, m), 1.92 (2H, m), 1.15 (3H, s), 1.00 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.47 minutes, 510 (M+H)+.
Example 36 3-r(2-Cvanophenyl)amino1-2-fr(2S)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- yl1carbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
To a suspension of Intermediate 17 (400mg, 0.96mmol) in 2-ethoxyethanol (5mL) was added (S)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.48mL, 4.81 mmol) and the reaction heated at 78°C for 2 days. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography (silica, 30-80% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a solid (123mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.26 (1 H, bs), 7.57-7.48 (4H, m), 7.40-7.36 (3H, m), 7.26 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.00- 6.95 (2H, m), 6.44 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.29-4.33 (1 H, m), 3.68-3.61 (2H, m), 3.52-3.46 (2H, m), 1.97-1.83 (2H, m), 1.81-1.73 (1 H, m), 1.60-1.53 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.98 minutes, 471 (M+H)+.
Example 37
3-r(2-Cvanophenvπamino1-2-fr(2 ?)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one To a suspension of Intermediate 17 (400mg, 0.96mmol) in 2-ethoxyethanol (5mL) was added (R)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.48mL, 4.81 mmol) and the reaction heated at 78°C for 2 days. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography (silica, 30-80% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (105mg). δH (CDCI3) 9.25 (1 H, bs), 7.57-7.48 (4H, m), 7.45-7.36 (3H, m), 7.26 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.00-6.95 (2H, m), 6.44 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.30 (1 H, m), 3.71-3.61 (2H, m), 3.52-3.47 (2H, m), 2.00-1.87 (2H, m), 1.80-1.70 (1 H, m), 1.65-1.60 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.94 minutes, 471 (M+H)+.
Example 38 3-Anilino-7-(cvclopropylmethvπ-2- (2R)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
A mixture of Intermediate 26 (500mg, 1.4mmol) and (R)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol (2mL, 20mmol) was heated at 130°C in a sealed Schlenk tube for 6 h. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and partitioned between EtOAc (50mL) and water (50mL). The EtOAc layer was washed with water (2 x 20mL), dried (Na2S04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20-50% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (405mg, 70%). δH (CDCI3) 9.31 (1 H, bs), 7.23-7.14 (3H, m), 6.99-6.94 (3H, m), 6.24 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.40-4.34 (1 H, m), 4.18-4.16 (1 H, m) 3.98-3.88 (3H, m), 3.76-3.58 (3H, m), 2.04-1.93 (3H, m), 1.90-1.81 (1 H, m), 1.67-1.61 (1 H, m), 0.62-0.58 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.12 minutes, 424 (M+H)+.
Example 39 3-r(3-Cvanophenyl)amino1-2-(r(2J?)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl -7-phenylthienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7tf)-one
To a suspension of Intermediate 16 (224mg) in 2-ethoxyethanol (2mL) was added (f?)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (1.0mL) and the reaction heated at 110°C for 18 h in a sealed tube. Solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue purified by column chromatography (silica, 70% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (112mg). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.18 (1 H, s), 7.90 (1 H, dd, J 9.6, 1.3Hz), 7.80-7.62 (5H, m), 7.51 (1 H, t, J 7.9Hz), 7.37- 7.25 (3H, m), 6.69 (1H, d, J 9.6Hz), 4.75 (1 H, m), 4.00 (1 H, m), 3.50-3.28 (3H, m), 2.90 (1 H, m), 1.95-1.65 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.99 minutes, 471 (M+H)+.
Example 40
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(r(2 ?)-2-(hvdroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1- vπsulfonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
A mixture of Intermediate 62 (340mg), trifluoroacetic acid (5mL) and DCM (20mL) was stirred at r.t. overnight. Solvents were removed in vacuo and the residue azeotroped with toluene (x 3). The residue was dissolved in DCM, treated with triethylamine (10mL) and the mixture concentrated in vacuo. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in DCM) gave the title compound (160mg, 23%). δH (CDCI3) 7.58-7.49 (3H, m), 7.36-7.31 (3H, m), 7.02 (1 H, d, J 9.9Hz), 6.99-6.78 (3H, m), 6.38 (1 H, d, J 9.9Hz), 3.73-3.69 (1 H, m), 3.65-3.45 (2H, m), 3.35-3.28 (1 H, m), 3.25-3.17 (1 H, m), 2.15 (1 H br m), 1.97-1.60 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.34 minutes, 518 (M+H)+.
Example 41 2-{r(3 ?)-3-Aminopyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>-3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1- 7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Intermediate 35 (1g, 1.77 mmol) and (R)-3-aminopyrrolidine dihydrochloride (309mg, 1.95mmol) were dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL) and treated with triethylamine (360mg, 3.0mmol). After stirring at room temperature for 18 h the reaction mixture was washed with water, the organic phase separated, dried (sodium sulphate) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 0-100%THF in DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid (300mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 9.08 (1 H, brs), 7.67-7.50 (6H, m), 7.35-7.27 (1 H, m), 7.06-6.93 (2H, m), 6.47 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.43-3.32 (2H, m), 3.31-3.28 (1 H, m), 3.00 (1 H, dd, J 4.0, 10.5Hz), 1.89-1.77 (1 H, m), 1.65-1.53 (1 H, m), 1.52-1.45 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.25 minutes, 467 (M+H)+.
General procedure for preparing amide Examples from pentafluoro- phenyl esters
The following Examples 42-53 were all prepared from the appropriate pentafluorophenyl ester intermediate and amine starting materials following the method described for Example 41. Where necessary reactions were run in the presence of a tertiary amine base such as triethylamine to neutralise acid salts of the starting materials.
Example 42
2-fr(2S)-2- Aminomethyl pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -3-r(2,4- difluorophenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one Prepared from Intermediate 35 (1g, 1.77mmol), (SJ-2-(aminomethyl)- pyrrolidine (192mg, 1.95mmol) and triethylamine (360mg, 3.0mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (silica, 0-100% THF in DCM) gave the title compound as a white solid (296mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 8.73 (1 H, brs), 7.74 (1 H, d, J 9.3Hz), 7.66-7.56 (3H, m), 7.52-7.50 (2H, m), 7.29 (1 H, dt, J 2.6, 8.9Hz), 6.99-6.89 (2H, m), 6.42 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 3.88-3.78 (1 H, m), 2.43 (1 H, dd, J 3.7, 12.6Hz), 2.12 (1 H, dd, J 7.9, 12.5Hz), 1.75-1.56 (4H, m), 1.30-1.11 (2H, brm). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.32 minutes, 481 (M+H)+.
Example 43 2-fr(2R)-2-(Aminomethvnpyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -3-r(2.4- difluorophenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 )-one
Prepared from Intermediate 35 (1g, 1.77mmol), (R)-2-(aminomethyl)- pyrrolidine (350mg, 1.95mmol) and triethylamine (2mL, 14.3mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (reverse phase silica, 60% ethanol:40% water) gave the title compound as a white solid (390mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.38 (1 H, s), 7.64-7.54 (3H, m), 7.50-7.31 (2H, m), 7.32-7.24 (1 H, m), 7.11-7.03 (1 H, m), 6.97-6.90 (1 H, m), 6.87-6.81 (1 H, m), 6.44 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.33-4.27 (1 H, m), 3.77-3.67 (1 H, m), 3.61-3.54 (1 H, m), 2.95 (1 H, dd, J 5.1 , 12.9Hz), 2.83 (1 H, dd, J 6.1 , 12.9Hz), 2.08-1.74 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.32 minutes, 481 (M+H)+.
Example 44
3-r(2.4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3R)-3-(dimethylamino)pyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl>-7-phenylthienoF2,3-b'|pyridin-6(7f/)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 35 (0.75g, 1.33mmol) and (R)-3- (dimethylamino)pyrrolidine (166mg, 1.46mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (reverse phase silica, 60% ethanol:40% water) gave the title compound as a white solid (440mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 8.82 (1 H, s), 7.67-7.59 (4H, m), 7.52-7.49 (2H, m), 7.35-7.27 (1 H, m), 7.03-6.91 (2H, m), 6.48 (1H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.50-3.21 (4H, m), 3.00 (1H, t, J 8.9Hz), 2.06 (6H, s), 1.96-1.92 (1 H, m), 1.59-1.49 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.266 minutes, 495 (M+H)+.
Example 45
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-f(4-hvdroxypiperidin-1-yl)carbonvπ-7- phenylthienor2.3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.36mmol) and 4-hydroxypiperidine (110mg, 1.1 mmol) by the method of Example 41 to give the title compound as a white powder (100mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.93 (1 H, s), 7.51 (3H, m), 7.35 (2H, m), 7.24 (1H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.81-6.93 (2H, m), 6.75 (1 H, m), 6.41 (1 H, d, J_9.7Hz), 3.86 (3H, m), 3.22 (2H, m), 1.77 (2H, m), 1.40 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.90 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 46 rac-3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-r(3-hydroxypiperidin-1-yl)carbonvn- 7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7f -one Prepared from Intermediate 35 (200mg, 0.36mmol), 3-hydroxypiperidine hydrochloride (98mg, 0.70mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (101 mg, 0.78mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (silica, 15% THF in DCM) gave the title compound as a white solid (137mg). NMR δH (CDCl3) 7.46-7.55 (3H, m), 7.33-7.35 (2H, m), 7.23 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.82-6.93 (2H, m), 6.70-6.75 (1 H, m), 6.41 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.72-3.77 (1 H, m), 3.56-3.60 (1 H, m), 3.38-3.49 (3H, m), 1.70-1.80 (2H, m), 1.53-1.59 (1 H, m), 1.38-1.42 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.02 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 47
2-(r(3R)-3-Aminopyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -3-r(4-fluoro-3- methylphenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 34 (1.0g, 1.79mmol), (R)-3-aminopyrrolidine dihydrochloride (311 mg, 1.96mmol) and triethylamine (1 mL, 7.2mmol) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (silica, 10% isopropanol in DCM) gave the title compound as a yellow solid (620mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.54 (1 H, bs), 7.56-7.44 (3H, m), 7.34-7.31 (2H, m), 7.19-7.14 (1 H, m), 6.88-6.75 (3H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 10.2Hz), 3.73-3.65 (2H, m), 3.59-3.52 (2H, m), 3.29 (1 H, dd, J 11.0, 4.5 Hz), 2.37-2.06 (2H, bm), 2.17 (3H, d, J 2.3Hz), 2.04-1.95 (1 H, m), 1.70-1.62 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.33 minutes, 463 (M+H)+.
Example 48
2-frf2S)-2-(Aminomethyl)pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3- methylphenyl)amino1-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one Prepared from Intermediate 34 (1.0g, 1.79mmol), (S)-2-(aminomethyl)- pyrrolidine (200mg) and triethylamine (1 mL) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (reverse phase silica, 60% MeCN in water) gave the title compound as a white solid (260mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.57 (1 H, bs), 7.64- 7.55 (3H, m), 7.43-7.31 (2H, m), 7.28-7.24 (1 H, m), 6.98-6.84 (3H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.30-4.23 (1 H, m), 3.75-3.69 (1 H, m), 3.61-3.54 (1 H, m), 2.94 (1 H, dd J 11.8, 4.4Hz), 2.75 (1 H, dd, J 12.8, 7.0Hz), 2.27 (3H, d, J 1.8Hz), 2.04-1.74 (4H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.36 minutes, 477 (M+H)+.
Example 49 3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-2-(r(3R)-3-(dimethylamino)- Pyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 34 (1.0g, 1.79mmol), (R)-3-(dimethylamino)- pyrrolidine (245mg, 2.15mmol) and triethylamine (1mL) by the method of Example 41. Chromatography (silica, 50-100% MeCN in DCM) gave the title compound as a pale yellow solid (610mq). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.50 (1 H, bs), 7.55-7.45 (3H, m), 7.34-7.32 (2H, m), 7.17 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 6.89-6.75 (3H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 3.81-3.68 (2H, m), 3.52-3.42 (1 H, m), 3.31-3.24 (1 H, m), 2.67-2.57 (1 H, m), 2.17 (9H, s), 2.06-1.93 (1 H, m), 1.80-1.70 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.34 minutes, 491 (M+H)+.
Example 50
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-(rf3R4R)-3,4-dihvdroχypyrrolidin-1- vncarbonyl>-7-phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 35 (196mg, 0.35mmol) and (3R,4R)-3,4- dihydroxypyrrolidine (107mg, 1.04mmol) by the method of Example 41. Column chromatography (silica, 0-8% MeOH in DCM) gave the title compound as a yellow solid (111 mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.33-7.41 (3H, m), 7.20 (2H, bm), 7.02 (1 H, m), 6.82-6.88 (1 H, m), 6.68-6.74 (1 H, m), 6.58-6.63 (1 H, m), 6.23 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.02 (2H, m), 3.69 (2H, m), 3.43 (2H, d, J 12.5Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.79 minutes, 484 (M+H)+.
Example 51
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenvnamino1-2-fr(3/?*,4S*)-3.4-dihvdroχypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 0-one Prepared from Intermediate 35 (250mg, 0.44mmol), c/'s-3,4-dihydroxy- pyrrolidine hydrochloride (130mg, 0.94mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (127mg, 0.98mmol) by the method of Example 41. Column chromatography (silica, 5-15% THF in DCM) gave the title compound as a yellow solid (98mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.48-7.56 (3H, m), 7.31-7.34 (2H, m), 7.15 (1 H, m), 6.96-7.02 (1 H, m), 6.82-6.88 (1 H, m), 6.72-6.78 (1 H, m), 6.36 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.20-4.22 (2H, m), 3.77 (2H, m), 3.53 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.84 minutes, 484 (M+H)+.
Example 52
3-r(2-Cvanophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-7- phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 67 (340mg, 0.61 mmol) and (S)-3-hydroxy- pyrrolidine (227mg, 2.60mmol) by the method of Example 41. Column chromatography (silica, 30-100% EtOAc in isohexane) gave the title compound as a white solid (210mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 9.68 (1 H, s), 7.86 (1 H, m), 7.72-7.81 (4H, m), 7.63-7.71 (3H, m), 7.19 (1 H, m), 7.12 (1 H, d), 6.64 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 5.07 (1 H, bs), 4.34 (1 H, bs), 3.59 (3H, m), 3.39 (1 H, m), 1.88-1.97 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.81 minutes, 457 (M+H)+.
Example 53 3-r(2-Cvanophenvπamino1-2-(r(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>-7- phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7//)-one
Prepared from Intermediate 67 (340mg, 0.61 mmol) and (R)-3-hydroxy- pyrrolidine (227mg, 2.60mmol) by the method of Example 41. Column chromatography (silica, 30-100% EtOAc in isohexane) gave the title compound as a white solid (225mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 9.59 (1 H, s), 7.70 (1 H, m), 7.62-7.73 (4H, m), 7.54-7.60 (3H, m), 7.10 (1 H, m), 7.03 (1 H, m), 6.56 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.98 (1 H, bs), 4.25 (1 H, bs) 3.51 (3H, m), 3.30 (1 H, m), 1.79-1.88 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.81 minutes, 457 (M+H)+. Example 54 rac-2-(r3-Aminopyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-3-r(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-
7-phenylthienor2,3-61pyridin-6(7H)-one
Intermediate 64 (270mg, 0.48mmol) was dissolved in 4M HCl in dioxane (30mL) and stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue dissolved in DCM and washed with sat. NaHCOs(aq) (x 2). The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS0 ) and the crude product purified by column chromatography (silica, 2-6% MeOH in DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid (89mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 9.01 (1 H, s), 7.42-7.59 (6H, m), 7.25 (1 H, m), 6.98 (2H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 5.50 (1 H, bm), 3.45 (3H, m), 3.20 (1 H, m), 1.86 (1 H, m), 1.65 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.23 minutes, 467 (M+H)+.
Example 55 2-{r(3S)-3-Aminopyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -3-F(2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1- 7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6 7H)-one
Intermediate 65 (0.7g, 1.24mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (10mL), treated with trifluoroacetic acid (5mL) and stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residual trifluoroacetic acid removed by azeotrope with heptane. The resulting yellow oil was redissolved in dichloromethane, washed with sodium hydrogen- carbonate solution, dried over sodium sulphate and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography (reverse phase silica, 60% ethanol:40% water) gave the title compound as a white solid (336mg). NMR δH (DMSO) 9.08 (1 H, s), 7.66-7.50 (6H, m), 7.35-7.27 (1 H, m), 7.08-6.94 (2H, m), 6.47 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.43-3.35 (2H, m), 3.02-2.98 (1 H, m), 1.83-1.76 (1 H, m), 1.68-1.48 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.239 minutes, 467 (M+H)+.
Example 56 2-fr(3S)-3-Aminopyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl -3-r(4-fluoro-3- methylphenyl)amino]-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7fj)-one Intermediate 66 (1.2g, 1.79mmol) was dissolved in dioxane (20mL), treated with c.HCI (5mL) and stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (100mL) and neutralised with sat. NaHC03(aq). The aqueous was extracted with several portions of DCM and the combined extracts dried (MgS0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 50-100% MeCN in DCM and then 15% isopropanol in DCM) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (520mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.57 (1 H, bs), 7.56-7.46 (3H, m), 7.35-7.32 (2H, m), 7.19-7.15 (1 H, m), 6.89-675 (3H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 3.74-3.66 (2H, m), 3.61-3.53 (2H, m), 3.24 (1 H, dd, J 10.9, 4.6 Hz), 2.17 (3H, d, J 1.6Hz), 2.03-1.97 (1 H, m), 1.89-1.67 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.32 minutes, 463 (M+H)+.
Example 57 3-r(2.4-Difluorophenvπamino1-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-(r(3R)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl1fthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 73 (876mg, 1.54mmol) in EtOH (45mL) was added 10% HCI(aq) (5mL) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (100mL), washed with sat. NaHCOs(aq) (x 2) and then brine. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 80% EtOAc in isohexane, loading the product in DCM) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (270mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.36 (2H, m), 7.19 (3H, m), 6.99 (1 H, m), 6.76 (1 H, m), 6.72 (1 H, m), 6.33 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.45 (1 H, m), 3.62 (4H, m), 1.85 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.04 minutes, 486 (M+H)+.
Example 58
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-7-(4-fluorophenvπ-2-frf3S)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl}thienof213-b1pyridin-6(7 0-one To a solution of Intermediate 74 (767mg, 1.35mmol) in EtOH (45mL) was added 10% HCI(aq) (5mL) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (100mL), washed with sat. NaHC03(aq) (x 2) and then brine. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 80% EtOAc in isohexane, loading the product in DCM) to give the title compound as a yellow solid (304mg). NMR δH (CDC13) 7.27 (2H, m), 7.20 (3H, m), 6.99 (1 H, m), 6.85 (1 H, m), 6.74 (1H, m), 6.36 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.46 (1 H, m), 3.75-3.50 (4H, m), 1.97 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.05 minutes, 486 (M+H)+.
Example 59
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenvπamino1-7-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-fr 3S)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one To a solution of Intermediate 75 (980mg, 1.35mmol) in EtOH (45mL) was added 10% HCI(aq) (5mL) and the reaction stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (100mL), washed with sat. NaHC03(aq) (x 2) and then brine. The organic layer was separated, dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 50-100% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (654mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.27 (2H, m), 7.14 (3H, m), 6.84-6.72 (3H, m), 6.26 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.39 (1 H, m), 3.62 (4H, m), 2.12 (3H, s), 1.88 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.12 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 60
7-f2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r(4-fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-{r(3S)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 78 (623mg, 1.07mmol) following the procedure used for Example 58 to give a light yellow solid (253mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.60 (1 H, s), 7.64-7.57 (1 H, m), 7.52-7.37 (3H, i
m), 7.25 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 6.98-6.70 (3H, m), 6.34 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.34 (1 H, bs), 3.72-3.50 (4H, m), 3.08 (1H, bs), 2.22 (3H, s), 1.86 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.17 minutes, 498 (M+H)+.
Example 61
7-(2-Chlorophenvn-2-{r(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl)-3-r(3- methylphenyl)amino1thienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7/y)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 79 (509mg, 0.90mmol) following the procedure used for Example 58. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a light yellow solid (253mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.62 (1 H, bs), 7.72-7.60 (1 H, m), 7.58-7.25 (4H, m), 7.23-7.20 (1 H, m), 7.02-6.86 (3H, m), 7.46 (1H, d, J 7.3Hz), 4.35 (1 H, bs), 3.74-3.50 (4H, m), 3.13 (1 H, bs), 2.40 (3H, s), 1.96 (2H, bs). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.12 minutes, 480 (M+H)+.
Example 62
7-(2-Chlorophenvn-3-r(2.4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-fr(3S)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vncarbonyl>thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H -one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 80 (750mg, 1.28mmol) following the procedure used for Example 58 to' give a light yellow solid (367mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.56 (1 H, s), 7.69-7.58 (1 H, m), 7.43-7.38 (3H, m), 7.26 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.07-6.97 (1 H, m), 6.95-6.87 (1 H, m), 6.80-6.78 (1 H, m), 6.40 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.35 (1 H, s), 3.77-3.52 (4H, m), 3.00 (1 H, bs), 1.90 (2H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.10 minutes, 502 (M+H)+.
Example 63
3-r(2.4-Difluorophenvπamino1-2-fr(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrol8din-1- vncarbonyl>-7-(4-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
To a solution of Intermediate 81 (1.0g, 2.31 mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (212mg, 0.23mmol, 10 mol %) and (+/-)-BINAP (288mg, 0.46mmol, 20 mol %) in toluene (50mL) and under nitrogen was added 2,4-difluoroaniline (300μL, 2.77mmol) and caesium carbonate (1.05g, 3.23mmol, 1.4 equiv.). The reaction was heated at 100°C under nitrogen for 4 days. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80mL), washed with water, brine (x 2), dried (MgS04) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (123mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.49 (1 H, s), 7.33-7.30 (2H, m), 7.22-7.18 (2H, m), 7.16 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 6.97 (1 H, dd, J 9.0, 5.7Hz), 6.86-6.81 (1 H, m), 6.75-6.72 (1 H, m), 6.35 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.42 (1 H, bs), 3.70-3.62 (3H, m), 3.56-3.53 (1 H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 1.97-1.85 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.13 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 64 3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-(r(3S)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyll-7- 4-methylphenyl)thienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 81 (1.0g, 2.3mmol) and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline (347mg) following the method of Example 63. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 20% EtOAc in DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid (60mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 9.56 (1 H, bs), 7.33-7.30 (2H, m), 7.22-7.13 (3H, m), 6.89-6.78 (3H, m), 6.31 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.44 (1 H, m), 3.71-3.67 (3H, m), 3.63-3.57 (1 H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 2.17 (3H, d, J 1.8Hz), 1.96-1.90 (2H, m), 1.59 (1 H, bs). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.20 minutes, 478 (M+H)+.
Example 65
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenvπamino1-2-(r(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1 - vncarbonyl>-7-(4-methylphenvπthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6f7 y)-one The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 82 and 2,4- difluoroaniline following the method of Example 63 to give a white solid. NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.44-7.21 (2H, m), 7.19-7.16 (3H, m), 6.99-6.97 (1 H, m), 6.96-6.94 (1 H, m), 6.92-6.87 (1 H, m), 6.98 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.44 (1 H, bs), 3.71-3.63 (3H, m), 3.57-3.54 (1 H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 1.99-1.96 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.14 minutes, 482 (M+H)+.
Example 66
3-r(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-fr(3R)-3-hvdroxypyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl)-7-(4-methylphenvπthienor2.3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
The title compound was prepared from Intermediate 82 (1.0g, 2.3mmol) and 4-fluoro-3-methylaniline (0.34mL, 2.7mmol) following the method of Example 63. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (silica, 70% EtOAc in isohexane) to give the title compound as a white solid (80mg). NMR δH (CDCI3) 7.32-7.30 (2H, m), 7.27-7.15 (3H, m), 6.88-6.77 (3H, m), 6.35 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.42 (1 H, bs), 3.73-3.62 (4H, m), 2.39 (3H, s), 2.17 (3H, s), 1.98-1.89 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.17 minutes, 478 (M+H)+.
Example 67
3-[(4-Fluoro-3-methylphenyl)amino1-2-F(3-hvdroxyazetidin-1- vDcarbonvπ-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Intermediate 85 (1.89g, 3.55mmol) was suspended in EtOH (76mL) and 10% HCl (10mL) and stirred at 40°C for 36 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue redissolved in DCM/MeOH. Decolourising charcoal (0.09g) was added and the suspension stirred for 30 min, filtered and reconcentrated to give crude product (1.58g, 99%). This crude material was suspended in EtOH (8mL) and stirred at r.t. for 4 h. The solid was isolated by filtration, washed with EtOH (3 x 2mL) and dried in vacuo to yield the pure title compound (1.49g, 94%). δH (CDCI3) 9.60 (1 H, s), 7.52-7.63 (3H, m), 7.38-7.41 (2H, m), 7.16-7.19 (1 H, d), 6.86-6.98 (3H, m), 6.35-6.39 (1 H, d), 4.36-4.42 (2H, m), 3.97-4.03 (2H, m), 2.33-2.43 (1 H, m), 2.25 (3H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.09 min, (M+H)+ 450. Example 68
2-r(4-Aminopiperidin-1-yl)carbonvn-3-r(2,4-difluorophenvπamino1-7- phenylthienor2,3-blpyridin-6(7H)-one
Intermediate 86 (326mg, 0.46mmol) was dissolved in a solution of HCl in 1 ,4- dioxane (4. ON) and stirred under N2 at r.t for 18 h. The crude product was concentrated in vacuo and triturated with Et20. Purification by chromatography (silica, 5% MeOH in DCM) gave the title compound as a light brown solid (175mg, 80%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.41 (1 H, s), 7.86 (1 H, d, J 9.6 Hz), 7.68-7.59 (5H, m), 7.31-7.26 (1 H, m), 7.00-6.91 (2H, m), 6.89-6.53 (3H, m), 3.90-3.87 (2H, m), 3.10-2.95 (1 H, m), 2.70-2.66 (2H, m), 1.75-1.72 (2H, m), 1.20-1.11 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.17 minutes, 481 (M+H)+.
Example 69
2-r(3-Aminoazetidin-1-yl)carbonvn-3-r(2,4-diflυorophenyl)aminol-7- phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
From Intermediate 87 (386mg, 0.70mmol) by the method of Example 68 to give the title compound as an off-white solid (303mg, 95%). δH (DMSO-d6) 9.29 (1 H, s), 8.20-7.80 (2H, br s), 7.70-7.63 (3H, m), 7.57-7.53 (2H, m), 7.46- 7.40 (1 H, m), 7.32 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 7.22-7.16 (1 H, m), 7.12-7.05 (1 H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J 9.7Hz), 4.33-4.25 (2H, m), 4.05-3.90 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.23 minutes, 453 (M+H)+.
Example 70
3-r(2.4-Diflυorophenyl)amino1-2-{r4-(dimethylamino)piperidin-1- yllcarbonyl>-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7 /)-one
Example 68 (111 mg, 0.23mmol), paraformaldehyde (70mg, 0.56mmol) and sodium cyanoborohydride (36mg, 0.54mmol) in MeOH (10mL) were stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was acidified using aq HCl (2N) and stirred for 20 min. The acidic mixture was neutralised with 10% aq. NaOH and extracted with DCM. The DCM extract was dried (Na2S0 ) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by chromatography (silica, 2% MeOH in DCM) to give the title compound as an off-white solid (30mg, 25%). δH (CDCI3) 8.00 (1 H, s), 7.63-7.52 (3H, m), 7.42-7.40 (2H, m), 7.32 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 7.00-6.90 (2H, m), 6.82-6.75 (1 H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 4.42- 4.35 (2H, m), 2.95-2.80 (2H, m), 2.35-2.25 (1 H, m), 1.90-1.75 (2H, m), 1.54 (6H, s), 1.40-1.30 (2H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.20 minutes, 509 (M+H)+.
Example 71
3-[(2,4-Difluorophenyl)amino1-2-{r3-(dimethylamino)azetidin-1- yl1carbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-i lpyridin-6(7f/)-one From Example 69 (168mg, 0.37mmol), paraformaldehyde (103mg, 0.82mmol) and sodium cyanoborohydride (52mg, 0.82mmol) by the method of Example 70 to give the title compound as an off-white solid (130mg, 70%). δH (DMSO-d6) 11.23 (1 H, s), 7.71-7.62 (3H, m), 7.56-7.54 (2H, m), 7.44-7.39 (2H, m), 7.18-7.12 (1 H, m), 7.08-7.04 (1 H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J 9.7 Hz), 4.15- 3.95 (2H, m), 3.85-3.75 (2H, m), 3.10-3.00 (1H, m), 2.07 (6H, s). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.26 minutes, 481 (M+H)+.
Example 72
3-r(2,4-Difluorophenvπamino1-2-fr(3S)-3-(dimethylamino)pyrrolidin-1- vπcarbonyl}-7-phenylthienor2,3-b1pyridin-6(7H)-one
Intermediate 35 (1.0g, 1.77mmol) and (S)-3-dimethylaminopyrrolidine (222mg, 1.95mmol) were dissolved in DCM and stirred at r.t. for 18 h. The solution was washed with aq NaHC03 solution, dried (Na2S04) and concentrated in vacuo. Chromatography (60:40 ethano water on reverse phase silica) gave the title compound (387mg, 44%). δH (DMSO-d6) 8.82 (1 H, br s), 7.67-7.59 (4H, m), 7.51 (2H, dd, J 1.78, 8.15Hz), 7.36-7.28 (1 H, m), 7.00-6.91 (2H, m), 6.48 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 3.50-3.24 (3H, m), 2.98 (1 H, t, J 9.7Hz), 2.50-2.44 (1 H, m), 2.03 (6H, s), 1.97-1.91 (1 H, m), 1.50 (1 H, t, J 9.7Hz). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.214 minutes, 495 (M+H)+. Example 73
2-fr(3S)-3-(Dimethylamino)pyrrolidin-1-vHcarbonyl}-3-r(4-fluoro-3- methylphenv0amino1-7-phenylthienor2.3-frlpyridin-6(7H)-one
From Intermediate 34 (1g, 1.77mmol) and (S)-3-dimethylaminopyrrolidine (222mg, 1.94mmol) by the method of Example 72. δH (DMSO-d6) 8.78 (1 H, s), 7.67-7.56 (4H, m), 7.51 (2H, dd, J 8.2, 1.9Hz), 7.00 (1 H, t, J 9.11 Hz), 6.83-6.80 (1 H, m), 6.75-6.70 (1 H, m), 6.49 (1 H, d, J 9.6Hz), 3.44-3.20 (3H, m), 2.97 (1H, t, J 9.9Hz), 2.42-2.35 (1 H, m), 2.15 (3H, s), 1.99 (6H, s), 1.91- 1.87 (1 H, m), 1.47-1.40 (1 H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 2.282 minutes, 491 (M+H)+.
Example 74
7-(2-Chlorophenyl)-3-r 2,4-difluorophenyl)amino1-2-{r(3R)-3- hvdroxypyrrolidin-1-vπcarbonyl>thienor2,3-blpyridin-6f7tf -one From Intermediate 90 (3.0g, 5.1 mmol) by the method of Example 62 to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (1.61 g, 63%). δH (CDCI3) 7.60-7.57 (1 H, m), 7.48-7.33 (3H, m), 7.19 (2H, m), 7.00 (1 H, dt, J 9.0, 5.7Hz), 6.87- 6.82 (1 H, m), 6.77-6.73 (1 H, m), 6.35 (1 H, d, J 9.8Hz), 4.43-4.40 (1 H, m), 3.69-3.52 (4H, m), 1.97-1.91 (3H, m). LCMS (ES+) RT 3.10 minutes, 502 (M+H)+.
Preparation of activated human p38α for inhibitor assays
Purification of human p38α Human p38α, incorporating an N-terminal (His)6 tag, was expressed in baculovirus-infected High-Five™ cells (Invitrogen) according to the manufacturer's instructions. The cells were harvested 72 h post-infection and Iysed in phosphate buffered saline (PBS) containing 1% (w/v) β- octylglucoside and Complete, EDTA-free™ protease inhibitors (Roche Molecular Biochemicals). The lysate was centrifuged at 35000 x g for 30 min at 4°C and the supernatant applied to a NiNTA™ column (Qiagen). Bound protein was eluted by 150mM imidazole in PBS (after a wash with 15mM imidazole in PBS) and directly applied to a HiTrap Q™ column (AP Biotech). Bound protein was eluted using a 20 column volume, 0 to 1 M NaCl gradient. Fractions containing (His)6-p38 were aliquotted and stored at -70°C prior to their activation.
Preparation of GST-MKK6EE-containing lysates
E. coli (BL21 pLysS) expressing the constitutively activated form of human MKK6 fused with an Λ/-terminal glutathione-S-transferase tag (GST- MKK6EE) were harvested by centrifugation and frozen at -70°C. Cells were lysed by resuspension in 1/10th the culture volume of PBS containing Complete, EDTA-free™ protease inhibitors followed by sonication on ice for 4 x 15 sec. Cell debris was removed by centrifugation at 35,000 x g and the resultant supernatant stored in aliquots at -70°C.
Activation of (His)6-p38
0.45mL of purified (His)6-p38 was incubated with 50μL of the GST-MKK6EE- containing lysate for 30 min at 23°C in the presence of 1 mM β- glycerophosphate, 10mM MgCI and 9mM ATP. The extent of activation was monitored by mass spectrometric detection of the doubly-phosphorylated form of (His)6-p38, which routinely comprised greater than 90% of the final (His)6-p38 preparation. The activated (His)6-p38 was then diluted x 10 in PBS and repurified using the method described above. The concentration of purified, activated (His)6-p38 was measured by UV absorbance at 280nm using A280, 0.1 % = 1.2 and the preparation stored in aliquots at -70°C prior to its use in inhibitor assays. p38 Inhibition Assays
Inhibition of phosphorylation of biotinylated mvelin basic protein (MBP)
The inhibition of p38 catalysed phosphorylation of biotinylated MBP is measured using a DELFIA based format. The assay was performed in a buffer comprising 20mM HEPES (pH 7.4), 5mM MgCI2 and 3mM DTT. For a typical IC50 determination, biotinylated MBP (2.5μM) was incubated at room temperature in a streptavidin-coated microtitre plate together with activated gst-p38 (10nM) and ATP (1μM) in the presence of a range of inhibitor concentrations (final concentration of DMSO is 2 percent). After fifteen minutes the reaction was terminated by the addition of EDTA (75mM). The microtitre plate was then washed with Tris buffered saline (TBS), prior to the addition of 100μl of anti-phospho MBP antibody (mouse) together with europium-labeled anti-mouse IgG antibody. After one hour at room temperature the plate was again washed in TBS followed by the addition of Enhancement solution (PerkinElmer Wallac). Fluorescence measurements were performed after a further fifteen minutes at room temperature.
IC50 values are determined from the plot of log inhibitor concentration (x- axis) versus percentage inhibition of the fluorescence generated by a control sample in the absence of inhibitor (y-axis).
Purification of human Peripheral Blood Mononuclear Cells
Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) were isolated from normal healthy volunteers. Whole blood was taken by venous puncture using heparinised vacutainers (Becton Dickinson), diluted 1 in 4 in RPMI 1640 (Gibco, UK) and centrifuged at 400g for 35 min over a Ficoll-paque gradient (Amersham-Pharmacia Biotech, UK). Cells at the interface were removed and washed once followed by a low speed spin (250g) to remove platelets. Cells were then resuspended in DMEM containing 10% FCS, penicillin 100 units ml"1, streptomycin 50μg ml"1 and glutamine 2mM (Gibco, UK). Inhibitor dilutions
Inhibitor stocks (20mM) were kept as a frozen solution (-20°C) in DMSO. Serial dilutions of inhibitors were performed in DMSO as 250-times concentrated stocks. Inhibitors were diluted 1 in 250 into tissue culture media, prewarmed to 37°C and transferred to plates containing PBMC. PBMC and inhibitors were incubated together for 30 min prior to addition of LPS. Inhibitors used in whole blood assays were prepared according to a different regime. Using the same stock solution serial dilutions of inhibitors were performed in DMSO. Inhibitors were then diluted 1 in 500 straight into whole blood in a volume of 1μL. Inhibitor was incubated with whole blood for 30 min prior to the addition of LPS.
LPS stimulation of PBMC PBMC were resuspended at a density of 2 x 105 cells/well in flat bottomed 96-well tissue culture treated plates. After the addition of inhibitor cells were stimulated with an optimal dose of LPS (E coli strain B5:055, Sigma, at a final concentration of 1μg ml"1) and incubated at 37°C in 5% C0 /95% air for 18 hours. TNF- levels were measured from cell free supernatants by sandwich ELISA (BioSource #CHC1751 ).
LPS stimulation of whole blood
Whole blood was taken by venous puncture using heparinised vacutainers (Becton Dickinson), and 500μl of blood aliquoted into each well of a 24-well tissue culture treated plate. After the addition of inhibitor cells were stimulated with an optimal dose of LPS (E coli strain B5:055, Sigma, at a final concentration of 1μg ml"1) and incubated at 37°C without C02 for 18 hours. TNF-α levels were measured from cell free supernatants by sandwich ELISA (BioSource #CHC1751). Rat LPS induced TNF release
Male Lewis rats (180-200g) are anaesthetised with Isofluor and injected i.v. with LPS* in a volume of 0.5ml sterile saline. After 90 minutes blood is collected into EDTA tubes for preparation of plasma samples. Plasma is stored at -70°C prior to assay for TNF-α by commercial ELISA.
Rat CIA
Female Lewis rats (180-200g) are anaesthetised with Isofluor and immunised i.d. at the base of the tail with 2 x 100μl of emulsion containing 4mg/ml bovine collagen II in 0.01 M acetic acid and Freund's Incomplete Adjuvant at a ratio of 1 :1. A polyarthritis develops with onset from about 13 days post sensitisation. The disease is mainly confined to the ankles and is quantified by plethysmometry. Results are expressed as change in paw volume over time.
In the p38 inhibitor assays described above compounds of the invention have IC50 values of around 1μM and below. The compounds of the invention are clearly potent inhibitors of p38 kinase, especially p38α kinase.

Claims

Claims:
1. A compound of formula (1 ):
Figure imgf000125_0001
wherein:
Y is a linking group -C(O)- or -S(0)2-; n is zero or the integer 1 ; m is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4; p is the integer 1 , 2, 3 or 4;
Rd is an -OH, -(Alk2)OH (where Alk2 is a straight or branched Cι_4 alkylene chain), -OR1 (where R1 is a straight or branched C1-6 alkyl group), -(Alk2)OR1, -NR2R3 (where R2 and R3 may be the same or different and is each independently a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched Cι-6 alkyl group),
-(Alk2)NR2R3 or straight or branched Cι-6 alkyl group;
Alk1 is a straight or branched Cι-4 alkylene chain;
Cy1 is an optionally substituted cycloaliphatic, aromatic or heteroaromatic group; and
Ar is an optionally substituted aromatic or heteroaromatic group; and the salts, solvates, hydrates and A/-oxides thereof.
2. A compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein Rd is -OH, -(Alk2)OH, -(Alk2)OR1, -NR2R3 or -(Alk2)NR2R3, in which Alk2, R1, R2 and R3 are as defined in claim 1.
3. A compound as claimed in claim 1 or claim 2 wherein Alk2 is -CH2- or -C(CH3)2-.
4. A compound as claimed in any one of the preceding claims wherein R1 is methyl.
5. A compound as claimed in any one of the preceding claims wherein R2 is hydrogen or methyl.
6. A compound as claimed in any one of the preceding claims wherein R3 is hydrogen or methyl.
7. A compound as claimed in any one of the preceding claims wherein Cy1 is phenyl, fluorophenyl, chlorophenyl, methylphenyl or cyclopropyl.
8. A compound as claimed in any one of the preceding claims wherein Ar is phenyl, difluorophenyl, (chloro)(fluoro)phenyl, (fluoro)(methyl)phenyl, chlorophenyl, cyanophenyl or methylphenyl.
9. A compound as claimed in claim 1 as herein specifically disclosed in any one of the Examples.
10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (1 ) as defined in claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or Λ/-oxide thereof, in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
11. The use of a compound of formula (1 ) as defined in claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or Λ/-oxide thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment and/or prevention of a disorder for which an inhibitor of p38 MAP kinase is indicated.
12. A method for the treatment and/or prevention of a disorder for which an inhibitor of p38 MAP kinase is indicated, which comprises administering to a patient in need of such treatment a compound of formula (1 ) as defined in claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or Λ/-oxide thereof.
PCT/GB2004/002621 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors WO2004113347A1 (en)

Priority Applications (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EA200600064A EA010297B1 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
JP2006516443A JP2007516161A (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
BRPI0410653-9A BRPI0410653A (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 compound, pharmaceutical composition, and use of a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or n-oxide thereof
US10/561,052 US7521460B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
CA002528602A CA2528602A1 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
MXPA05013227A MXPA05013227A (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors.
EP04742976A EP1641804A1 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
AU2004249495A AU2004249495A1 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
IL172132A IL172132A0 (en) 2003-06-20 2005-11-23 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
NO20060279A NO20060279L (en) 2003-06-20 2006-01-19 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB0314492A GB0314492D0 (en) 2003-06-20 2003-06-20 Chemical compounds
GB0314492.0 2003-06-20
GB0329485.7 2003-12-19
GB0329485A GB0329485D0 (en) 2003-12-19 2003-12-19 Chemical compounds

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004113347A1 true WO2004113347A1 (en) 2004-12-29

Family

ID=33542685

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2004/002621 WO2004113347A1 (en) 2003-06-20 2004-06-18 Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors

Country Status (12)

Country Link
US (1) US7521460B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1641804A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2007516161A (en)
KR (1) KR20060021905A (en)
AU (1) AU2004249495A1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0410653A (en)
CA (1) CA2528602A1 (en)
EA (1) EA010297B1 (en)
IL (1) IL172132A0 (en)
MX (1) MXPA05013227A (en)
NO (1) NO20060279L (en)
WO (1) WO2004113347A1 (en)

Cited By (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2007044515A1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2007-04-19 Exelixis, Inc. Azetidines as mek inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
WO2007062167A2 (en) * 2005-11-23 2007-05-31 Intermune, Inc. Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
WO2007115822A1 (en) * 2006-04-07 2007-10-18 Develogen Aktiengesellschaft Thienopyrimidines having mnkl /mnk2 inhibiting activity for pharmaceutical compositions
WO2008076415A1 (en) * 2006-12-14 2008-06-26 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using mek inhibitors
WO2008124085A2 (en) * 2007-04-03 2008-10-16 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using combinations of mek and jak-2 inhibitors
WO2008064829A3 (en) * 2006-11-30 2008-10-23 Ucb Pharma Sa Novel aminothienopyridinone derivatives processes for preparing them and pharmaceutical compositions thereof
US8283359B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2012-10-09 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8350037B2 (en) 2007-07-23 2013-01-08 Ucb Pharma, S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8487101B2 (en) 2008-01-21 2013-07-16 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8486953B2 (en) 2008-08-26 2013-07-16 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8637491B2 (en) 2008-06-19 2014-01-28 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8648068B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-02-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Heterocycloalkyl-containing thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8697713B2 (en) 2006-07-10 2014-04-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrrolopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
WO2014081800A1 (en) * 2012-11-21 2014-05-30 Zoetis Llc Synthesis of spirocyclic isoxazoline derivatives
US8754079B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-06-17 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Cycloalkyl containing thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8853193B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-10-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Thienopyrimidines containing a substituted alkyl group for pharmaceutical compositions
US8969347B2 (en) 2008-06-03 2015-03-03 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for treating inflammatory and fibrotic disorders
US9359379B2 (en) 2012-10-02 2016-06-07 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US9527816B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2016-12-27 Intermune, Inc. Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
US10233195B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2019-03-19 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US11414396B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2022-08-16 Exelixis, Inc. Process for making compounds for use in the treatment of cancer

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB0214268D0 (en) * 2002-06-20 2002-07-31 Celltech R&D Ltd Chemical compounds
GB0218800D0 (en) * 2002-08-13 2002-09-18 Celltech R&D Ltd Chemical compounds
JP2007516162A (en) * 2003-06-20 2007-06-21 セルテック アール アンド ディ リミテッド Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2005042540A1 (en) * 2003-10-24 2005-05-12 Celltech R & D Limited Thieno-pyridinone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2012018638A2 (en) 2010-07-26 2012-02-09 Biomatrica, Inc. Compositions for stabilizing dna, rna and proteins in blood and other biological samples during shipping and storage at ambient temperatures
WO2012018639A2 (en) 2010-07-26 2012-02-09 Biomatrica, Inc. Compositions for stabilizing dna, rna and proteins in saliva and other biological samples during shipping and storage at ambient temperatures
EP3249054A1 (en) 2012-12-20 2017-11-29 Biomatrica, INC. Formulations and methods for stabilizing pcr reagents
EP3007556B1 (en) 2013-06-13 2020-05-20 Biomatrica, INC. Cell stabilization
ES2891555T3 (en) 2014-06-10 2022-01-28 Biomatrica Inc Platelet stabilization at room temperatures
EP4242628A3 (en) 2015-12-08 2023-11-08 Biomatrica, INC. Reduction of erythrocyte sedimentation rate

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999064400A1 (en) * 1998-06-12 1999-12-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated INHIBITORS OF p38
WO2003033502A1 (en) * 2001-10-16 2003-04-24 Celltech R & D Limited Bicyclic oxopyridine and oxopyrimidine derivatives
WO2004000846A1 (en) * 2002-06-20 2003-12-31 Celltech R & D Limited Arylamine substututed bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as p38 kinase inhibitors

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6048863A (en) * 1994-04-19 2000-04-11 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Condensed-ring thiophene derivatives and thienopyrimidine derivatives, their production and use
GB0218800D0 (en) * 2002-08-13 2002-09-18 Celltech R&D Ltd Chemical compounds
JP2007516162A (en) * 2003-06-20 2007-06-21 セルテック アール アンド ディ リミテッド Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2005042540A1 (en) * 2003-10-24 2005-05-12 Celltech R & D Limited Thieno-pyridinone derivatives as kinase inhibitors

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999064400A1 (en) * 1998-06-12 1999-12-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated INHIBITORS OF p38
WO2003033502A1 (en) * 2001-10-16 2003-04-24 Celltech R & D Limited Bicyclic oxopyridine and oxopyrimidine derivatives
WO2004000846A1 (en) * 2002-06-20 2003-12-31 Celltech R & D Limited Arylamine substututed bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as p38 kinase inhibitors

Cited By (55)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10010536B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2018-07-03 Intermune, Inc. Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
US9527816B2 (en) 2005-05-10 2016-12-27 Intermune, Inc. Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
CN104892582B (en) * 2005-10-07 2019-09-27 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 Azetidine as the mek inhibitor for treating proliferative disease
EA032466B1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2019-05-31 Экселиксис, Инк. Methods of making mek inhibitors
US11597699B2 (en) 2005-10-07 2023-03-07 Exelixis, Inc. MEK inhibitors and methods of their use
CN109053523B (en) * 2005-10-07 2022-03-25 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 Azetidines as MEK inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
NO344876B1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2020-06-08 Exelixis Inc MEK inhibitors and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
CN110668988A (en) * 2005-10-07 2020-01-10 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 Azetidines as MEK inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US7803839B2 (en) 2005-10-07 2010-09-28 Exelixis, Inc. Azetidines as MEK inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
US7915250B2 (en) 2005-10-07 2011-03-29 Exelixis, Inc. Azetidines as MEK inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
EA019983B1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2014-07-30 Экселиксис, Инк. Mek inhibitors and methods of using same
CN104892582A (en) * 2005-10-07 2015-09-09 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 Azetidines as mek inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
CN109053523A (en) * 2005-10-07 2018-12-21 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 Azetidine as the mek inhibitor for treating proliferative disease
US8362002B2 (en) 2005-10-07 2013-01-29 Exelixis, Inc. Azetidines as MEK inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
WO2007044515A1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2007-04-19 Exelixis, Inc. Azetidines as mek inhibitors for the treatment of proliferative diseases
IL260127A (en) * 2005-10-07 2018-07-31 Exelixis Inc Mek inhibitors and methods of their use
NO347091B1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2023-05-15 Exelixis Inc Compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of proliferative diseases
CN103524392B (en) * 2005-10-07 2018-06-01 埃克塞利希斯股份有限公司 As for treating the azetidine of the MEK inhibitor of proliferative disease
KR101341792B1 (en) 2005-10-07 2013-12-23 엑셀리시스, 인코포레이티드 Azetidines as MEK Inhibitors for The Treatment of Proliferative diseases
EA025871B1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2017-02-28 Экселиксис, Инк. Mek inhibitors and methods of using the same
WO2007062167A2 (en) * 2005-11-23 2007-05-31 Intermune, Inc. Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
WO2007062167A3 (en) * 2005-11-23 2007-11-15 Intermune Inc Method of modulating stress-activated protein kinase system
US8394822B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2013-03-12 Ucb Pharma, S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8604051B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2013-12-10 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8283359B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2012-10-09 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
WO2007115822A1 (en) * 2006-04-07 2007-10-18 Develogen Aktiengesellschaft Thienopyrimidines having mnkl /mnk2 inhibiting activity for pharmaceutical compositions
US8633201B2 (en) 2006-04-07 2014-01-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Thienopyrimidines having Mnk1/Mnk2 inhibiting activity for pharmaceutical compositions
US8697713B2 (en) 2006-07-10 2014-04-15 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrrolopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
WO2008064829A3 (en) * 2006-11-30 2008-10-23 Ucb Pharma Sa Novel aminothienopyridinone derivatives processes for preparing them and pharmaceutical compositions thereof
AU2007334402B2 (en) * 2006-12-14 2014-02-13 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using MEK inhibitors
US7999006B2 (en) 2006-12-14 2011-08-16 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using MEK inhibitors
WO2008076415A1 (en) * 2006-12-14 2008-06-26 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using mek inhibitors
WO2008124085A3 (en) * 2007-04-03 2010-04-15 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using combinations of mek and jak-2 inhibitors
WO2008124085A2 (en) * 2007-04-03 2008-10-16 Exelixis, Inc. Methods of using combinations of mek and jak-2 inhibitors
US8350037B2 (en) 2007-07-23 2013-01-08 Ucb Pharma, S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8487101B2 (en) 2008-01-21 2013-07-16 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US9290450B2 (en) 2008-06-03 2016-03-22 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for treating inflammatory and fibrotic disorders
USRE47142E1 (en) 2008-06-03 2018-11-27 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for treating inflammatory and fibrotic disorders
US8969347B2 (en) 2008-06-03 2015-03-03 Intermune, Inc. Compounds and methods for treating inflammatory and fibrotic disorders
US8637491B2 (en) 2008-06-19 2014-01-28 Ucb Pharma S.A. Thieno-pyridine derivatives as MEK inhibitors
US8486953B2 (en) 2008-08-26 2013-07-16 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8648068B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-02-11 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Heterocycloalkyl-containing thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8754079B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-06-17 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Cycloalkyl containing thienopyrimidines for pharmaceutical compositions
US8853193B2 (en) 2010-02-26 2014-10-07 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Thienopyrimidines containing a substituted alkyl group for pharmaceutical compositions
US10898474B2 (en) 2012-10-02 2021-01-26 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US10376497B2 (en) 2012-10-02 2019-08-13 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US9359379B2 (en) 2012-10-02 2016-06-07 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US9675593B2 (en) 2012-10-02 2017-06-13 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US11414396B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2022-08-16 Exelixis, Inc. Process for making compounds for use in the treatment of cancer
CN104918944A (en) * 2012-11-21 2015-09-16 硕腾服务有限责任公司 Synthesis of spirocyclic isoxazoline derivatives
EP4056572A1 (en) * 2012-11-21 2022-09-14 Zoetis Services LLC Synthesis of spirocyclic isoxazoline derivatives
US9593126B2 (en) 2012-11-21 2017-03-14 Zoetis Services Llc Synthesis of spirocyclic isoxazoline derivatives
WO2014081800A1 (en) * 2012-11-21 2014-05-30 Zoetis Llc Synthesis of spirocyclic isoxazoline derivatives
US10544161B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2020-01-28 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones
US10233195B2 (en) 2014-04-02 2019-03-19 Intermune, Inc. Anti-fibrotic pyridinones

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20070099894A1 (en) 2007-05-03
MXPA05013227A (en) 2006-03-09
CA2528602A1 (en) 2004-12-29
EA200600064A1 (en) 2006-08-25
KR20060021905A (en) 2006-03-08
JP2007516161A (en) 2007-06-21
AU2004249495A1 (en) 2004-12-29
EP1641804A1 (en) 2006-04-05
EA010297B1 (en) 2008-08-29
BRPI0410653A (en) 2006-07-04
US7521460B2 (en) 2009-04-21
IL172132A0 (en) 2006-04-10
NO20060279L (en) 2006-03-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7521460B2 (en) Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
US20110034495A1 (en) Method of Modulating Stress-Activated Protein Kinase System
AU2003253087B2 (en) Arylamine substututed bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as P38 kinase inhibitors
AU2003252990B2 (en) Bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as kinase inhibitors
AU2002336172B2 (en) Bicyclic oxopyridine and oxopyrimidine derivatives
AU2002336172A1 (en) Bicyclic oxopyridine and oxopyrimidine derivatives
AU2004249498B2 (en) Thienopyridone derivatives as kinase inhibitors
EP1448555A1 (en) Pyridine and pyrimidine derivatives
US7456286B2 (en) Bicyclic heteroaromatic compounds as kinase inhibitors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 172132

Country of ref document: IL

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004742976

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2005/09717

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200509717

Country of ref document: ZA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2005/013227

Country of ref document: MX

Ref document number: 12005502193

Country of ref document: PH

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2528602

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 5823/DELNP/2005

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020057024352

Country of ref document: KR

Ref document number: 2006516443

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 20048173202

Country of ref document: CN

Ref document number: 2004249495

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 544593

Country of ref document: NZ

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2004249495

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20040618

Kind code of ref document: A

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004249495

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200600064

Country of ref document: EA

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020057024352

Country of ref document: KR

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2004742976

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0410653

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007099894

Country of ref document: US

Ref document number: 10561052

Country of ref document: US

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 10561052

Country of ref document: US